Garmin | G1000H: Bell 407GX | Garmin G1000H: Bell 407GX G1000H Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GX

Garmin G1000H: Bell 407GX G1000H Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GX
G1000H
™
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
Bell 407GX
Copyright © 2011, 2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1237.07 or later for the Bell 407GX Helicopter. Some differences in
operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.
G1000H™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. This trademark may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
January, 2014
190-01255-01 Rev. A
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
Printed in the U.S.A.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
Within the warranty period, Garmin will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or
replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and/or labor incidental to the direct repair of said product. Garmin may,
at its discretion with prior approval, reimburse an authorized Garmin Service Center for associated labor costs incurred for removal and
replacement of the panel mount product installed in an aircraft. The customer shall be responsible for any transportation or other cost. This
warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product
damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or
other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider
of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin
reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any
country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply in every case.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating the nearest Service Center, call
Garmin Customer Service at one of the numbers listed below.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Garmin International Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062
Telephone:
(913)397-8200
Telephone Toll Free:
(888)606-5482
Facsimile:
(913)397-8282
Facsimile Toll Free:
(800)801-4670
E-mail: orders@garmin.com
avionics@garmin.com
warranty@garmin.com
ii
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Southampton, SO40
9RB, UK
Telephone:
++44 (0) 870-8501243
Telephone Toll Free:
++44 (0) 0808 238 0000
(option 5)
Facsimile:
++44 (0) 238052004
E-mail: avionics.europe@garmin.com
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74B Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000H, as installed in the Bell 407GX helicopter, has a very high degree of functional
integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all
conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation
to occur without a fault indication shown by the system. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect
such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the
cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, system operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
G1000H Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Bell 407GX Rotorcraft Flight Manual. Thoroughly practice
basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the system
to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts,
etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the system to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The system does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
iv
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
v
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-01255-00
190-01255-01
vi
Revision
Date
A
February, 2011
Page Range
All
Initial release
B
September, 2011
All
A
January 2014
All
Description
Added 3D Audio and Voice Recognition
Various clerical changes
Added GDU 14.00 parameters
Added Position Reporting feature
Added Scheduler feature
Added Pilot Profiles
Added Temperature Compensated Altitude
Added User-defined holds
Changed GFDS to Connext
Added Weight and Balance Planning
Added Hover Performance
Added Stormscope
Added Maintenance Logs
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................. 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................. 2
G1000H Controls...................................................... 6
PFD Controls................................................................. 6
Audio Panel Controls..................................................... 8
Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 10
System Power-up.................................................... 11
System Operation................................................... 12
Normal Display Operation............................................ 12
Reversionary Display Operation.................................... 13
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 14
G1000H System Annunciations..................................... 15
Softkey Function.......................................................... 16
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 22
Accessing G1000H Functionality.......................... 26
Menus........................................................................ 26
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 27
MFD System Pages...................................................... 31
Display Backlighting.............................................. 45
Automatic Adjustment................................................. 45
Manual Adjustment..................................................... 45
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 50
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 50
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 51
Altimeter.................................................................... 52
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 54
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 55
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 56
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 62
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 69
Temperature Displays................................................... 69
Wind Data.................................................................. 70
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 71
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 72
System Alerting........................................................... 72
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 72
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 73
HTAWS Annunciations.................................................. 73
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 74
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 74
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 74
Radar Altimeter........................................................... 76
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 78
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 78
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 79
SECTION 3 ENGINE AND CREW ALERTING SYSTEMS
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS) Strip................... 83
3.2 Engine Power and Speed Indications.................. 85
Power Situation Indicator............................................. 85
Dual Tachometer.......................................................... 86
Alternate Engine Data Source Annunciations.................. 86
3.3 Engine Page............................................................ 87
Engine Hour Display..................................................... 88
Power Assurance Check................................................ 88
Hover Performance...................................................... 89
3.4 Crew Alerting System (CAS).................................. 94
CAS Message Prioritization........................................... 96
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 99
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.................... 100
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 102
COM Operation..................................................... 104
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 104
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 105
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 106
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 107
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 111
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 112
COM Volume............................................................. 112
NAV Operation...................................................... 113
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 113
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 114
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 116
Marker Beacon Receiver (Optional)............................. 121
ADF/DME Tuning (Optional)........................................ 122
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 126
Transponder Controls................................................. 126
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 127
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 129
IDENT Function......................................................... 130
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 131
Power-Up.................................................................. 131
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 131
Intercom................................................................... 131
Clearance Recorder and Player (Optional).................... 137
Split COM................................................................. 137
3D Audio.................................................................. 138
Voice Recognition...................................................... 140
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 143
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 144
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 145
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 145
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 145
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 145
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
viii
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction.......................................................... 147
Navigation Status Box................................................ 148
Using Map Displays.............................................. 150
Map Orientation........................................................ 150
Map Range............................................................... 152
Map Panning............................................................. 154
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 159
Topography............................................................... 160
Map Symbols............................................................ 163
Airways.................................................................... 169
Track Vector.............................................................. 171
Wind Vector.............................................................. 172
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 173
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 174
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 175
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 176
Waypoints.............................................................. 177
Airports.................................................................... 178
Intersections............................................................. 185
NDBs........................................................................ 187
VORs........................................................................ 189
User Waypoints......................................................... 191
Airspaces............................................................... 197
Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 201
Flight Planning...................................................... 207
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 208
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 213
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 215
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 217
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 224
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 226
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 229
Parallel Track............................................................. 231
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 234
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 235
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 236
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 238
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 238
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 243
Altitude Constraints................................................... 245
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 249
Departures................................................................ 249
Arrivals .................................................................... 252
Approaches .............................................................. 254
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 263
Trip Planning............................................................. 263
Weight and Balance Planning..................................... 267
Weight and Balance Caution And Warning Conditions... 270
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 271
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 274
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 302
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather................................................. 306
Activating Services..................................................... 306
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 307
Garmin Connext Weather.................................... 339
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 347
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 351
Abnormal Operations................................................. 364
Stormscope........................................................... 366
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 367
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 369
HTAWS................................................................... 372
Displaying HTAWS Data............................................. 373
HTAWS Page............................................................. 375
HTAWS Alerts............................................................ 377
System Status............................................................ 382
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 384
Profile View Display................................................... 384
6.6 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 387
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 388
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 390
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 391
System Status............................................................ 393
6.7 Garmin GTS Traffic................................................ 395
Theory of operation................................................... 395
TAS Alerts................................................................. 399
System Test............................................................... 400
Operation................................................................. 401
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS Status Box............................................................. 411
Speed References........................................................... 412
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)................... 414
SVT Operation........................................................... 415
SVT Features............................................................. 417
Field of View............................................................. 426
SafeTaxi................................................................. 428
ChartView.............................................................. 434
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 435
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 436
Chart Options............................................................ 444
Day/Night View......................................................... 450
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 452
FliteCharts............................................................. 455
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 456
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 456
Chart Options............................................................ 464
Day/Night View......................................................... 468
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 470
Airport Directory.................................................. 473
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.474
Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging........... 476
Registering With Garmin ConnexT............................... 476
Telephone Communication......................................... 478
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 485
Wi-Fi Connections................................................ 497
190-01255-01 Rev. A
8.8 Maintenance Logs................................................ 502
8.9 Position Reporting............................................... 511
8.10 SiriusXM Satellite Radio...................................... 514
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 514
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 516
8.11 Scheduler............................................................... 520
8.12 Auxiliary Video...................................................... 522
Video Setup.............................................................. 523
Display Selection....................................................... 524
Input Selection.......................................................... 525
Zoom/Range............................................................. 525
8.13 Abnormal Operation............................................ 526
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 526
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 526
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 527
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 531
CAS Messages........................................................... 531
G1000H System Annunciations................................... 533
G1000H System Message Advisories........................... 538
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 549
Database Management................................................. 551
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 551
Garmin Databases..................................................... 555
Glossary........................................................................... 561
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 567
General TIS Information................................................ 571
Introduction.............................................................. 571
TIS vs. TAS/TCAS........................................................ 571
TIS Limitations.......................................................... 571
Display Symbols............................................................. 573
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000H Integrated Flight Deck as installed in the Bell 407GX. The
G1000H system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040H Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 33H Mode S Transponder with extended
squitter
• GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit
• GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver (optional)
• GDC 74H Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GDL 59H Data Link (optional)
• GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit
• GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (optional)
• GSC 46 Signal Conditioner
• GTS 800 Traffic Avoidance System (optional)
• GRS 77H Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GA 58 Directional Antenna (optional)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GMA 350H Audio System with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GA 36 GPS/WAAS and GA 37 GPS/WAAS/SiriusXM
Antennas
A top-level G1000H system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GA 36, GA 37 and GA
58.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
• GDU 1040H (2) – One unit is configured as a PFD, the other as an MFD, each featuring a 10.4-inch LCD with
1024 x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the right/pilot side is designated as the PFD, and the one installed
on the left/copilot side is designated as the MFD. These units communicate with each other and with the onside GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
• GIA 63H (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each GIA 63H
contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration
microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with a respective GDU 1040H via HSDB connection. The GIA 63Hs
are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
• GDC 74H (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the G1000H system, and it communicates
with the each GIA 63H, GDU 1040H and GRS 77H, using an ARINC 429 digital interface (it also interfaces
directly with the GTP 59). The GDC 74H is designed to operate in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
(RVSM) airspace.
• GEA 71H (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Hs using an RS-485 digital interface.
2
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GSC 46 (1) – The GSC 46 is a signal conditioner which converts tachometer and engine torque information to
a digital format for use by the GEA 71H.
• GRS 77H (1) – Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both GDU 1040H units
and the both GIA 63H units. The GRS 77H contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate
sensors) and interfaces with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, with the GDC 74H to obtain air
data, and with both GIA 63Hs to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of operation are discussed later in this
document.
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77H for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77H and communicates with the GRS 77H,
using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMA 350H (1) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls. This unit
communicates with both GIA 63Hs, using an RS-232 digital interface.
• GTX 33H/ES (1) – The GTX 33H/ES is a solid-state, Mode-S transponder that provides Modes A, C and S
operation. The unit is controlled through the PFD and communicates with both GIA 63Hs through an RS-232
digital interface. Extended Squitter (ES) provides ADS-B output.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GDL 69AH (1) – A satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the G1000H MFD (and,
indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69AH communicates
with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is required to enable
the GDL 69AH capability.
• GDL 59H (1) – GDL 59H operation is performed with the MFD through the HSDB. Connectivity with the GSR
56 for the Iridium telephone feature is through the RS-232 bus.
• GSR 56H (1) – The Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means of pilot and copilot
headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can also send and receive data provided by the GDL 59H through the
RS-232 bus.
• GTP 59 (1) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the GDC 74H.
• GTS 800 – The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode S and Mode C
transponders to provide Traffic Advisories to the pilot independent of the air traffic control system.
4
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GA 58 (2) – The GA 58 are directional antennas for the Traffic Avoidance System. One top-mounted directional
antenna is required. Optional bottom mounted antenna offers better threat visibility.
• GA 36 (1) and GA 37 (1) – The GA 36 is a through-mount GPS/SBAS antenna. The GA 37 is a through-mount
GPS/SBAS antenna with SiriusXM/Data Link.
GA 36
GDU 1040H
(MFD)
GA 37
GDL 59H
(optional)
GSR 56H
(optional)
GDL 69AH
(optional)
GTS 800
(optional)
GMU 44
GRS 77H
GDU 1040H
(PFD)
GDC 74H
GTP 59
GIA 63H #1
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GMA 350H
GIA 63H #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GEA 71H
GSC 46
GTX 33H
Figure 1-1 G1000H System (LRU Configuration)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 G1000H CONTROLS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 350) are described in the CNS & Audio Panel.
The G1000H system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the
PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
11
14
12
15
16
18
17
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
2
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
4
Heading Knob
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize
the Selected Heading to the and current heading
6
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5
6
Joystick
Turn to change map range
CRS/BARO Knob
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
7
COM Knob
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
8
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
10
Direct-to Key (
11
FPL Key
12
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
13
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
16
FMS Knob
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob
moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)
System Knob)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
17
Softkey Selection
Keys
18 ALT Knob
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
Large (Outer)
Knob
Small (Inner)
Knob
Figure 1-3 Dual Concentric Knob
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
20
21
Figure 1-4 GMA 350H Audio Panel Controls
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
8
1
MKR/MUTE Key
2
COM1 Key
Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon
receiver audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received.
Enables Music Mute feature. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 Key
When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM3 Key
Reserved for optional COM radio.
5
NAV1 Key
When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
6
AUX Key
When selected, audio from the AUX input can be heard.
7
Selects and deselects telephone and entertainment audio.
Telephone/
Entertainment Key
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
8
MUSIC Key
Selects and deselects music audio.
9
MAN SQ Key
Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator
Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack
Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 Key
13
MIC2 Key
14
MIC3 Key
15
NAV2 Key
Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be
heard. COM2 or COM3 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 or COM3
Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/
COM2 or COM1/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be
heard. COM1 or COM3 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM3
Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/
COM2 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
Selects the #3 transmitter for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be
heard. COM1 or COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM2
Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/
COM3 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
16
PILOT Key
Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
17
COPLT Key
Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
18
PASS Key
Selects and deselects the passenger intercom isolation.
19
SPKR Key
Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The
SPKR Key flashes during PA.
Turn to move the cursor (flashing green annunciator) to the desired source.
20
Cursor (CRSR)
Control Knob
21 Volume (VOL)
Control Knob
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source (indicated
by the flashing green annunciator). Press to switch to Blue-Select mode. BlueSelect mode distributes the Music and Telephone audio to any combination of
headset positions.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation database.
NOTE: Ensure that the G1000H system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Not all SD cards are compatible with the G1000H. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft
manufacturer.
Install an SD card
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
SD Card Slots
Figure 1-5 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
10
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (RFMS) for specific procedures concerning avionics
power application and emergency power supply operation.
The G1000H system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000H PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-7. ALTN is also displayed
on the Power Situation Indicator and Torque will be marked QA. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within one minute of power-up at normal temperature, but may take as long as 10 minutes at cold
temperatures. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily illuminated on the audio panels,
the control units and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-6), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Pilot Profile selection
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Auxiliary (AUX) Weight Planning Page.
Figure 1-6 MFD Power-up Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Figure 1-7 PFD Initialization
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. Each IAU is
connected to a single display, as shown in Figure 1-1. This allows the units to share information, enabling true system
integration.. This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000H display operation, as well as the various
AHRS modes and G1000H System Annunciations.
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The Power Situation Indicator and CAS messages are also displayed on the PFD.
The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see the Flight Management
Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EICAS; see the EICAS
Section).
Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
Figure 1-8 Normal Mode
12
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: The G1000H System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix
A for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the G1000H System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode.
In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU Ethernet interface to the display is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Figure 1-9 Reversionary Mode
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red DU BACKUP Button on the instrument panel. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the AHRS is not operating normally can degrade AHRS accuracy.
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77H AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. In Heading Preset Mode, the magnetometer data is replaced by a heading value set by the
pilot. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data information
for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-10) and depend
upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is
communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
available
unavailable
GPS Data
unavailable
available
unavailable
le
ab
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Magnetometer Data
available
available
unavailable
Magnetometer Data
Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-10 AHRS Operation
GPS INPUT FAILURE
The G1000H system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the
other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs
fail, the AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer
inputs are available and valid.
14
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
G1000H SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the
Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (RFMS) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these
annunciations.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (Figure 1-11 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000H power-up, certain
windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. If any window remains flagged, the G1000H system
should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
GIA 63H Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63H Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74H Air
Data Computer
GRS 77H AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71H Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63H Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74H Air
Data Computer
Figure 1-11 G1000H System Failure Annunciations
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
GTX 33H Transponder
Or
GIA 63H Integrated
Avionics Units
15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey
On
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-12 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
Level 1
INSET
Level 2
OFF
DCLTR (3)
Level 3
Description
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
WX LGND
TRAFFIC
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather products
(optional)
Cycles through traffic display options:
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on inset map
TRFC-2: Traffic Map Page is displayed in the inset map window
TERRAIN
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on the Inset Map
STRMSCP
Displays Stormscope information on the Inset Map
NEXRAD
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map
(optional feature)
TOPO
16
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
XM LTNG
METAR
PFD
SYN VIS
DFLTS
Level 3
Description
Displays SiriusXM lightning information on Inset Map (optional feature)
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols shown on the Inset Map
(optional)
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision
features
PATHWAY Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and
vertical flight path of the active flight plan
SYN TERR Enables synthetic terrain depiction
HRZN HDG Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
APTSIGNS Displays position markers for airports within approximately
15 nm of the current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are
displayed when the airport is within approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
WIND
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3
OFF
DME
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, GPS/ waypoint
identifier and GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency
Provides access to the HSI formatting softkeys
BRG1
HSI FRMT
360 HSI
Displays the HSI in a 360 degree view
ARC HSI
Displays the HSI as an arc
BRG2
SET HDG
HDG SYNC
HDG HDG +
HPM OFF
ALT UNIT
METERS
IN
HPA
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Wind direction arrow and speed
Wind direction arrow with headwind and crosswind components
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed
Information not displayed
Displays the DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2 or GPS
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/
frequency.
Enables Heading Preset Mode
Synchronizes heading to the selected heading
Slews heading counterclockwise
Slews heading clockwise
Manually disables Heading Preset Mode
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to
metric units
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
STD BARO
Level 3
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
0—7
IDENT
BKSP
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
MSG
Description
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if METRIC softkey is
selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available
with active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing selection of the DME
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (transponder replies to
identification and altitude interrogations)
Allows manual selection of ground mode in certain conditions
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays the Message Window
CAS
MSG
CAS ↑
CAS ↓
Figure 1-13 Top Level PFD Softkeys
18
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
CAS
MSG
WX LGND
METAR
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to return to
the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-14 INSET Softkeys
(optional)
MSG
CAS
SET HDG
HSI FRMT
SYN VIS
ALT UNIT
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys
HDG SYNC
HDG -
HDG +
METERS
360 HSI
HPM OFF
IN
MSG
HPA
ARC HSI
MSG
MSG
MSG
PATHWAY
SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
MSG
Figure 1-15 PFD Configuration Softkeys
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MSG
CAS
MSG
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
MSG
Figure 1-16 XPDR (Transponder) Softkeys
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the previous level softkeys.
MFD SOFTKEYS
Level 1
ENGINE
Level 2
CAS ↑
CAS ↓
PWR CHK
HOV PWR
OGE
IGE
HOV-P
MAP
TRAFFIC
20
Level 3
Description
Displays the EIS-Engine Page
Scroll up (Displayed only when a sufficient
number of items are displayed in the
Crew Alerting System Display to warrant
scrolling)
Scroll down (Displayed only when a
sufficient number of items are displayed
in the Crew Alerting System Display to
warrant scrolling)
Displays fuel system softkeys
Performs a Hover Performance Power
Check
Performs a OGE (Out of Ground Effect)
Hover Performance Power Check
Performs a IGE (In Ground Effect) Hover
Performance Power Check
Enables Hover Prediction Mode
Enables second-level Navigation Map
softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation
Map
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
TOPO
AIRWAYS
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
DCLTR
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Level 3
Description
Displays topographical data (e.g.,
coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on Navigation Map
Displays airways on the map; cycles
through the following:
AIRWAYS: No airways are displayed
AIRWY ON: All airways are displayed
AIRWY LO: Only low altitude airways
are displayed
AIRWY HI: Only high altitude airways
are displayed
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage
information on Navigation Map (optional
feature)
Displays SiriusXM lightning information
on Navigation Map (optional feature)
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols
shown on the Navigation Map
Displays the legend for the selected
weather products. Available only when
NEXRAD, XM LTNG, and/or METAR
softkeys are selected.
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail;
cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features
visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the
active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport
and terminal procedure charts
When available, displays optional
checklists
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DCLTR
MAP
(optional)
(optional)
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
CAS ↑
HOV PWR
PWR CHK
CAS ↓
OGE
IGE
HOV-P
Press the BACK Softkey on
this level to return to the top
softkey level.
DCLTR-3
TRAFFIC
TOPO
AIRWAYS
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
AIRWAY HI
Figure 1-17 MFD Softkeys
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has acquired
satellites before the other, or in SBAS capable systems, one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS
signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS
receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of
the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD. If no
failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies
may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
a) Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
22
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
Enabled
SBAS
Options
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
RAIM Softkey
Selected
Figure 1-18 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
SBAS Softkey
Selected
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing 45°
above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of
Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle
centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a
statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to each
other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM, measures
of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy
values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude, ground speed, and track for the
aircraft are displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GPS receiver status
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the process
of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously
from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view. ACQUIRING is
indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for
terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight,
RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000H automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by the
messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available when
crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000H.
Or:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.
b) Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The G1000H
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
Or:
24
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
a) To use the present position, press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)(WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS capable systems only)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling WAAS, EGNOS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below
each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING G1000H FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
The G1000H has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options
list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on the
PFD
Options
with FPL
Window
Displayed
Figure 1-19 Page Menu Examples
26
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Management, Hazard Avoidance, and Additional Features sections for details on
specific pages.
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom Available pages in the group are
displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the group are shown
in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, SiriusXM, Procedure Loading), the
active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
Page Group
Active Page Title
Pages in
Current
Group
MFD
Page Groups
Figure 1-20 Page Title and Page Groups
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn either FMS Knob one click to display the pop-up page selection window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected. For example, the MAP page group is selected
in Figure 1-21.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
There are also several pages (Airport Information and XM Information pages) which are selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In
this case, the page remains set to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
Stormscope
Weather Data Link (service optional)
HTAWS
Figure 1-21 Map Pages
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport Information pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
Airport
Information
Pages
Figure 1-22 Waypoint Pages
28
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Weight & Balance
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
- System Setup 1
(SETUP 1 Softkey)
- System Setup 2
(SETUP 2 Softkey)
SiriusXM Radio
- SiriusXM Information
(INFO Softkey)
- SiriusXM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
Satellite Phone
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- SMS
(SMS Softkey)
WI-FI Setup
Maintenance Logs
Connext
System Status
Video
Satellite Phone
Pages
SiriusXM
Satellite
Pages
Figure 1-23 Auxiliary Pages
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
or
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
Figure 1-24 Flight Plan Pages
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Flight Plan Pages may also be accessed using the FPL Key. Main pages within this group are selected by
turning the small FMS Knob.
The Checklist Page may be accessed from the page group tab or the CHKLIST Softkey. See the Additional
Features section for a discussion on checklists.
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
Figure 1-25 Nearest Pages
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by bezel key. In some instances, softkeys
may be used to access the Procedure Pages.
The Flight Plan Pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
Figure 1-26 Procedure Pages
30
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SYSTEM PAGES
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The System
Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page displays the status
of all G1000H system LRUs.
SYSTEM SETUP PAGES
The two System Setup Pages allow management of the following system parameters:
• Pilot Profiles
• Date/time
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Baro Transition Alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
• Airspace Alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Arrival Alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Audio Alerts
• Flight Director
• Skid Type
• MFD Data Bar Fields (Navigation Status Box)
(see Flight Management Section)
• GPS CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• COM Configuration
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Nearest Airports display criteria
(see Flight Management Section)
• Inlet (see Engine Indication Section)
• Voice Callouts
(see Hazard Avoidance Section)
Selecting the System Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) Press the SETUP 1 or SETUP 2 Softkey to select the System Setup 1 or System Setup 2 Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-27 System Setup 1 Page
Figure 1-28 System Setup 2 Page
32
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Date/Time
The Date/Time Box on the System Setup 1 Page displays the current date and time and allows the pilot
to set the time format (local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC) and offset. The time offset is used to define
current local time. UTC (also called GMT or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS
satellites signals and cannot be changed. When using a local time format, designate the offset by adding or
subtracting the desired number of hours.
Set the system time format:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC) and press the
ENT Key.
Set the current time offset:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Display Units
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000H screens are listed on the System Setup 1
Page. The Navigation Angle reference and the Position units are pilot selectable.
Category
Navigation Angle
Settings
Magnetic (North)*
True (North)
User
Distance and Speed
Nautical*
Metric
Altitude and Vertical
Speed***
Feet*
Meters
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Kilograms
Pounds*
HDDD°MM.MM’*
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
MGRS
UTM/UPS
Fuel and Fuel Flow
Weight
Position
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Exceptions
N/A
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, TAWS
Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Weight Planning Page
N/A
All positions
N/A
* Default setting
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
To change a Display Units setting:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
34
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BARO Transition Alert
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
Airspace Alerts
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the MFD Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:
• Class B/TMA
• Restricted
• Class C/TCA
• MOA (Military)
• Class D
• Other airspaces
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
To change the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
To turn an airspace alert on or off:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Arrival Alerts
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 1 Softkey to select the System Setup 1 Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
7) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 1 Softkey to select the System Setup 1 Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Audio Alerts
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
To change the audio alert voice:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.
Flight Director
Two formats are available for the display of the flight director. Single Cue or X-Pointer may be selected.
To change the flight director format:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Active field in the Flight Director Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired flight director format and press the ENT Key.
Skid Type
The Skid Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the Skid Type to be set to LOW or HIGH/EMERG FLOATS.
Changing the Skid Type:
1) While on the System Setup 2 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Skid field in the Skid Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired skid type and press the ENT Key.
36
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD Data Bar Fields
The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup 1 Page displays the current configuration of the MFD
Navigation Status Box. By default, the Navigation Status Bar is set to display ground speed (GS), distance
to next waypoint (DIS), estimated time en route (ETE), and en route safe altitude (ESA).
To change the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Bar field:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list and press the ENT Key when the
desired data selection is highlighted.
The following data may be selected for display in each of the four fields of the Navigation Status Box.
• Bearing (BRG)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Distance (DIS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Track (TRK)
• En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
• Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
• Fuel Over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Endurance (END)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
GPS CDI
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course
deviation indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps up to 2 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 2.0 nautical
miles during the en route phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually
ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even
further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the system uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup 1 Page displays the following:
• Selected CDI range (auto, 2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• Current system CDI range (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Changing the CDI range:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SELECTED field in the GPS CDI Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the range list and press the ENT Key when the desired
selection is highlighted.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
COM Configuration
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States.
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
To change COM channel spacing:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
Nearest Airports
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup 1 Page defines the minimum runway length and surface
type used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A
minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or
runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are zero feet (or meters)
for runway length and “HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
To select nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the runway options (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and
press the ENT Key when the desired selection is highlighted.
To select nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
38
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Inlet
When the Particle Separator or Snow Baffle is installed on the engine air inlets, the system must adjust
the algorithms used to calculate the Power Assurance Check. This is accomplished by selecting these
options in the Inlet Box of the System Setup 1 Page.
To enable/disable the Particle Separator and/or Snow Baffle option:
1) While on the System Setup 1 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired option field in the Inlet Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob one click to the right to select ON or one click to the left to select OFF.
Pilot Profiles
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD power-up screen (Figure 1-6). The G1000H can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown
at the top of the System Setup 1 or System Setup 2 Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot
profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or deleted.
Figure 1-29 Pilot Profiles (System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
39
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
10) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) While on the System Setup 1 or Setup 2 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
4) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) While on the System Setup 1 or Setup 2 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) While on the System Setup 1 or Setup 2 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
40
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Voice Callouts
Altitude voice callouts for the HTAWS system may be enabled or disabled using the System Setup 2
Page.
Disabling HTAWS voice callouts:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 2 Softkey select the System Setup 2 Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Max Selected field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob one click to the right to disable the first callout value. Each subsequent click to the
right disables the next callout.
Enabling HTAWS voice callouts:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup.
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 2 Softkey to select the System Setup 2 Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Max Selected field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob one click to the left to enable the first callout value. Each subsequent click to the left
enables the next callout.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
41
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Bell service center or
Garmin dealer informed.
Display Database
Selection Softkey
Figure 1-30 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
Pressing the Display Database Selection Softkey (background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected)
places the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for
the database information. Each press of the Display Database Selection Softkey will change the softkey label
(PFD1 DB, etc) to indicate the display for which database information is displayed.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played, the RMP and master
warning/ caution PBAs to illuminate, and the instrument fan to activate.
42
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
UTILITY PAGE
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of
the time of departure. Trip statistics (odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds)
are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a discussion on the
Scheduler feature.
Figure 1-31 Utility Page
Timers
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
43
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
The G1000H records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the
time to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be
reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
44
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Trip Statistics
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The G1000H display and control backlighting can be adjusted either automatically or manually.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT
The existing instrument panel dimmer bus normally controls the PFD and MFD backlighting as well as the
PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel key annunciator lighting. When the dimmer bus is not used by the
G1000H system, photocell technology automatically controls backlighting adjustments. Photocell calibration
curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: The avionics dimming knob may also be used to adjust backlighting. Refer to the POH for details.
NOTE: In normal mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it can also
be adjusted from the MFD.
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu Window is displayed.
Backlighting may also be adjusted manually for all of the displays and the associated bezels. The audio panel
key backlighting is directly tied to the PFD key backlighting setting.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
45
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Adjust display backlighting manually:
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD DSPL’.
Figure 1-32 Manual Display Backlighting Adjustment
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box. Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the
ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ to the right of ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2 and 3.
5) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
Adjust key backlighting manually:
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD DSPL’.
Figure 1-33 Manual Key Lighting Adjustment
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’. Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ and turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’ and turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’.
7) Repeat steps 3 to 5.
8) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
46
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the
backup instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS modes.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instrument on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, engine, navigation, communication, terrain,
traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Indicated airspeed
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Generic timer
– Trend vector
• Vertical Navigation (VNV)
Indications
– Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude (MDA)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• Altimeter, showing
– Barometric setting
– Trend vector
– Reference altitude
• Radar Altimeter (optional)
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
• Timer/References Window,
showing
• Transponder Mode, Code, and
Ident/Reply
– Turn Rate Indicator
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
• Wind data
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
– Navigation source
• Engine data, showing
– Power Situation Indicator (PSI)
– Dual Tachometer
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
47
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
22
21
20
1
19
18
17
2
16
15
3
4
14
5
13
6
12
7
11
8
10
9
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Turn Rate Indicator
3
Current Heading
14
Altimeter Barometric Setting
4
Groundspeed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
5
Power Situation Indicator (PSI)
16
Selected Altitude
6
Selected Heading Bug
17
Altimeter
7
Dual Tachometer
18
Selected Altitude
8
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
19
Com Frequency Box
9
Softkeys
21
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
System Time
22
Attitude Indicator
11
Transponder Data Box
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
48
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
1
12
11
2
3
10
9
4
8
5
6
7
1
Traffic Annunciation
7
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
2
Radar Altimeter
8
Flight Plan Window
3
Selected Heading
9
Annunciation Window
4
Wind Data
10
Selected Course
5
DME Information Window
11
Glideslope Indicator
6
Bearing Information Windows
12
Marker Beacon Annunciation
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
49
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for speed criteria.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The groundspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape
are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it turns red.
Indicated
Airspeed
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Speed
Ranges
Figure 2-4 Shutter Covers
Indicated Airspeed
Figure 2-5 Red Pointer at VNE
Gound
Speed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
A color-coded (yellow, green, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote,
normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE).
A black and white checkered shutter covers the airspeed indication at or below 15 knots, and remains
displayed until reaching 20 knots.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed
range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to
the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate
of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the
line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses
VNE, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
50
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
2
6
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-6 Attitude Indicator
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Figure 2-7 Slip/Skid Indication
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
51
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. The large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 1000-ft increments,
the small knob in 100-ft increments. If the altimeter is set to display meters, the large knob adjusts the Selected
Altitude in 500-meter increments, the small knob in 50-meter increments.
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected
altitude.
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-8 Altimeter
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Figure 2-9 Altimeter (Metric)
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-9). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Select the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
52
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft
to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
Figure 2-10 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Select the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, select the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-10).
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
53
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing cyan barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
Figure 2-11 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 1000,
2000, and 3000 fpm (Figure 2-12). Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than
100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 3000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV Target
Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
54
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when SBAS
is available.
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used (Figure 2-12). The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-13) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance
(LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). The Glidepath Indicator, a magenta diamond (Figure 2-12) appears on the
display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the active waypoint, and FMS is the selected navigation
source. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-150
meters and lower limits depend on approach service level.
•
LNAV/VNAV is +/- 45 meters.
•
LPV/LP+V is +/- 15 meters. If the approach downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-12 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Figure 2-13 Glideslope Indicator
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
Figure 2-14 Glidepath Indicator
55
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a 360˚ compass rose and a
140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Select the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
17
16
15
1
14
2
3
13
4
5
12
6
11
10
7
9
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
10
To/From Indicator
2
Selected Heading
11
Course Pointer
3
Current Track Indicator
12
Heading Bug
4
Lateral Deviation Scale
13
Flight Phase
5
Navigation Source
14
Selected Course
6
Aircraft Symbol
15
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
7
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
16
Current Heading
8
Rotating Compass Card
17
Lubber Line
9
OBS Mode Active
Figure 2-15 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
56
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer
Navigation
Source
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Figure 2-16 Arc HSI
A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The current track is represented on the
HSI by a magenta diamond. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in cyan; the cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in cyan to the
upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is GPS and OBS mode is not active. The Selected
Course (CRS) is shown in cyan to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is VOR, LOC,
or GPS with OBS mode active.
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Heading
Heading Bug
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
57
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are set on the AUX - System Setup Page and are either
corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’), referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), or corrected
according to user input (denoted ‘U’). When an approach referenced to true north has been loaded into the
flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate
time.
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications (User)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’)
• USER - Angle set according to user input
Figure 2-20 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
58
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate
the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI
by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability. When
the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
NOTE: ADF radio installation is optional.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
ADF
Frequency
Bearing Source Pointer 1
Pointer 2
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
59
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-22) are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and display the following
information:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Select the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, select the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DME.
NOTE: DME installation is optional.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, select the DME Softkey again.
60
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HEADING PRESET MODE
Heading Preset Mode allows AHRS to compute heading data without using the magnetic sensing device. If
a magnet anomaly occurs (either due to interference or magnetometer failure), and Heading Preset Mode is
available, an alert will be provided in the alerts window. The heading refence for this mode is a pilot-entered
value.
Activating Heading Preset Mode:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the SET HDG Softkey.
To change the heading value, press the HDG+ or HDG- Softkey until reaching the desired value, or turn the
HDG knob until the Selected Heading Bug reaches the desired value, and then push the HDG SYNC Softkey.
While Heading Preset Mode is active, “SET” is annunciated within the heading indicator field. The heading
numeric values are displayed in cyan, indicating that the value may be modified by the pilot.
“SET”
Annunciation
Heading Preset
Mode Softkeys
Figure 2-23 Heading Preset Mode
Heading Preset Mode will stay active for eight minutes, however, the eight-minute time period is “reset” if
the heading value is changed within two minutes of activating the mode. The heading value can be changed
at any time while Heading Preset Mode is active, but the eight-minute duration is only “reset” by heading
value changes made during the first two minutes that the mode is active.
Heading Preset Mode may be deactivated at any time by pushing the HPM OFF Softkey, or the mode will
automatically deactivate at the completion of the eight-minute time period. If the difference between the
current heading and the magnetic heading is less than ten degrees, the heading indicator will immediately turn
to the magnetic heading, the “SET” annunciation will be removed, and the numeric heading will turn from
cyan to white. If the difference between current heading is greater than ten degrees, the “SET” annunciation
will change to “ALN” (Figure 2-24), and the numeric heading display will turn yellow, indicating that it
is not reliable. The heading indication will transition to the magnetic heading, at which time the “ALN”
annunciation will be removed and the numeric value will change from yellow to white.
“ALN”
Annunciation
Figure 2-24 Heading Alignment
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
61
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360º HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Figure 2-25 Course Deviation Indicator
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
Figure 2-26 Navigation Sources
62
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Select the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Select the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
Selecting the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-27 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after this switch.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
63
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-28 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-29, Table 2-1).
64
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-29 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-30 and 2-31). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
65
2 nm
FAF
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-30 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-31 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV and LP+V
Approach CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
LNAV
LNAV+V
Approach
LNAV/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
Missed Approach
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
LNAV
LNAV+V
L/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
MAPR
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-25)
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-26)
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
66
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map. If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
GPS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Extended
Course
Line
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-32 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
67
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-33. Selecting the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
Figure 2-33 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
68
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) in the lower left of the PFD under
normal display conditions and in reversionary display mode.
Normal Display
Reversionary Mode
Figure 2-34 Outside Air Temperature
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
69
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
Figure 2-35 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the WIND Softkey to display wind data display options.
3) Select one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrow and numeric speed
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow with headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) speed components
• OPTN 3: True wind direction arrow with true numeric wind direction and speed.
4) To remove the window, select the OFF Softkey.
70
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the
criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-36 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
Criteria
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RSVI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
71
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to the Engine Indication
and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) Section for information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS) and to Appendix
A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ALERTING
The System Messages Window conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000H
System. When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until pressed, which opens the System Messages Window and acknowledges the message(s) which initiated the
flashing. When the window is open, messages for conditions which are no longer active turn gray. Messages
generated while the window is open are not automatically displayed, but cause the MSG Softkey to begin
flashing again. Pressing the MSG Softkey while the System Messages Window is open closes the window unless
the MSG Softkey is flashing.
Annunciation
Window
Messages
Window
Softkey
Flashes for
New System
Message
Figure 2-37 Alerting System
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
Altimeter
Figure 2-38 Marker Beacon Annunciations
72
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and the Appendix for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-39) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “Traffic” aural alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed (refer
to the Hazard Avoidance section for alerts generated by TAS equipment)
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
Figure 2-39 Traffic Annunciation
Traffic
Symbols
Figure 2-40 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
HTAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System (HTAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper
left of the Altimeter. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on HTAWS alerts
and annunciations.
Figure 2-41 Traffic and Example HTAWS Annunciations
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
73
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, Altitude Alerting is reset. Altitude Alerting is based on the altitude
information shown on the PFD. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude Box changes to black text on
a cyan background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude Box changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and
an aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Figure 2-42 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is not
shown unless HTAWS alerting is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
Altimeter
Figure 2-43 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude, radar altitude, or temperature compensated can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed
to the lower left of the altimeter, with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the altimeter (once the altitude
is within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching
the MDA or DH:
74
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN, RA MIN, or
COMP MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) text. The bug appears on the
altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-44 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled.
Setting the barometric Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO, TEMP COMP, or RAD ALT. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT
Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet when BARO or TEMP COMP is
selected, or up to 2,500 feet when ‘RAD ALT’ is selected).
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-45 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
75
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
RADAR ALTIMETER
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is between
zero and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in green above the selected course (Figure 2-46). Display of
radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-3).
Radar Altimeter
Figure 2-46 Current Radar Height
Radar Height Range
Shown to Nearest
0 to 50 feet
1 foot
50 to 200 feet
5 feet
200 to 1500 feet
10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet
50 feet
Table 2-3 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude alerting function
(Figure 2-47), the color of the radar height changes to yellow (Figure 2-48).
Figure 2-47 RAD ALT Setting
(Timer/References Window)
Figure 2-48 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
76
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A ground line (Figure 2-49) is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground. If the data becomes invalid, the message “RA FAIL” is displayed in yellow in place of the current radar height
(Figure 2-50).
Ground
Line
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
Figure 2-49 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line (RAD ALT)
Figure 2-50 Radar Altimeter Invalid Data
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
77
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
INTEG OK
DR
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-51 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode, the CDI is removed (when GPS is the selected navigation source), and the following
items on the PFD are then shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
78
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High
Nose Low
Figure 2-52 Pitch Attitude Warnings
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter, Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display and
the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• AFCS Annunciations
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Flight Director Command Bars
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Inset Map
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Wind Data
– Alerts
• Selected Heading
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
• Selected Course
• System Time
190-01255-01 Rev. A
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• PFD Setup Menu
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
79
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
80
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
SECTION 3 ENGINE AND CREW ALERTING SYSTEMS
NOTE: Refer to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for limitations.
The G1000H Integrated Flight Deck offers improved flight operations and reduces pilot workload by
automatically monitoring critical system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight using
the following:
• The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and Dual Tachometer display engine information on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD). A larger version of the PSI and Dual Tachometer is also available on the Engine Page on
the Multi Function Display (MFD).
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) strip displays engine, electrical and fuel information on the MFD.
• The Crew Alerting System (CAS) displays advisories, cautions, and warnings to communicate conditions,
statuses, and system failures. CAS messages are grouped by level of importance and color-coded based on
urgency and appear in a window to the right of the Altimeter on the PFD and on the Engine page Alerts window
on the MFD.
In combination with these, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to inform
the crew of aberrant flight conditions.
PFD
CAS
Window
Power
Situation
Indicator
Dual
Tachometer
MFD
EIS Strip
Figure 3-1 EIS (Normal)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
81
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
In a display fails, the other display may be configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology
together with condensed EIS information (refer to the System Overview for more information about Reversionary
Mode).
EIS
Displays
CAS
Window
Figure 3-2 EIS (Reversionary Mode)
82
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
3.1 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS) STRIP
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may differ from
the actual aircraft configuration.
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital readouts. When unsafe operating conditions occur,
gauge pointers and readouts change color to indicate caution (yellow) or warning (red). Refer to each indicator
description for additional details on display behavior.
If the time limit for an unsafe condition is exceeded, the color of the pointers and digits may change to denote
an increase in priority level. Parameters out of the range of the readout display as a red “X”. If sensor data for
a parameter becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout and the
indicator may be removed. Dashes may also be displayed in place of a digital readout.
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square inch
(psi). A red triangle represents the oil pressure limitation during a cold
start (shown in normal mode only)
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Celsius
1
Engine Oil Pressure
(P)
2
5
Oil Temperature Indicator
(T)
Transmission Oil Pressure
(P)
Transmission Oil
Temperature (T)
Ammeter (A)
6
Voltmeter (V)
7
Fuel Quantity (TOTAL LBS Displays the usable fuel quantity in pounds. By default, total usable
fuel quantity is shown; when forward fuel tank is selected, ‘FWD’ is
or FWD LBS)
displayed above readout to indicate forward tank usable fuel quantity
is shown.
Displays fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Fuel Pressure Indicator
(PRESS PSI)
Total Fuel Quantity Gauge Displays total usable fuel quantity as a bar graph.
3
4
8
9
10
Displays the DC load in amperes to the nearest 5 amps
Displays the electrical bus voltage
Fuel Flow Indicator (FF
PPH)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the transmission in pounds per square
inch (psi).
Displays the transmission oil temperature in degrees Celsius
Displays fuel flow in pounds per hour (PPH)
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
83
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
7
9
10
Figure 3-3 MFD EIS Strip (Normal)
84
8
10
Figure 3-4 EIS Strip (Reversionary)
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE POWER AND SPEED INDICATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for engine operating limitations and corrective actions.
The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and Dual Tachometer are shown as a group in the lower-left of the PFD,
and on the EIS - Engine Page of the MFD in a larger format.
Maximum Continuous
Power Operation Limit
Power Available Gauge
Power Available Indicator
Cyclic Centering Annunciation
Box Indicates Parameter
Controlling PSI Indicator
Torque Readout
MGT Readout
NG Readout
NR Indicator
NR Readout
NP Indicator
Dual Tachometer Gauge
Figure 3-5 Power Situation Indicator Gauge and Dual Tachometer Gauge
POWER SITUATION INDICATOR
The PSI provides the pilot with the amount of power available based on engine torque (Q; shown as a
percentage), measured gas temperature (MGT, degrees Celsius, °C), and gas producer rotation speeds (NG;
shown as a percentage) with respect to operating limitations. A box is shown around the label for the readout
currently closest to its maximum continuous power (MCP) limits. This value also controls a pointer along a
numeric scale from 0 (no power) to 10 (MCP, shown with a red tick mark).
Operating limits are displayed along the PSI gauge and are adjusted dynamically in response to all parameters,
to show the range of pointer movement available beyond MCP before any parameter reaches the operating limit.
Green arcs indicate continuous operation ranges; yellow arcs indicate transient operating limits. A gray arc
becomes red if the Power Available Indicator enters this range; it indicates an exceedance is occurring.
In normal operations, the Power Available Indicator pointer will be the same color as the arc it is presently
within. If the FADEC is in manual mode and no engine exceedances are occurring, the pointer will be light blue
(instead of green). A gray pointer is displayed when an engine failure is detected while in-flight.
During engine start, a red triangle appears on the PSI arc when MGT is shown to correspond with MGT
starting limits, and remains displayed until the starter has been disengaged for 5 seconds.
TAKEOFF TIMER
After the engine has been started, if Q or MGT are within the takeoff limitation ranges, the G1000H displays
a 5-minute countdown timer inside the PSI gauge. The timer flashes beginning when 30 seconds remain until
an exceedance will occur; the timer is automatically removed when either Q or MGT fall below takeoff limits.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
85
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
CYCLIC CENTERING ANNUNCIATION
The yellow CYC CTR (cyclic centering) annunciation, located above and to the right of the PSI (Power
Situation Indicator), alerts the pilot that the cyclic stick is not in the correct position when the helicopter is
on the ground.
DUAL TACHOMETER
The dual tachometer displays rotor speed (NR) and power turbine speed (NP) as percentages. A readout
for NR is provided. The long pointer represents NR along the gauge scale; NP is shown with the short pointer.
Limitations are shown as colored arcs. A white tick mark represents the FADEC normal governing point. When
Quiet Mode is active, a magenta reference bug is shown the tachometer to indicate the Quiet Mode governing
point. The NR and NP pointers will be the same color as the arc(s) they are presently within.
During autorotation with an engine failure, the NP pointer will be displayed in gray and the dual tachometer
gauge scale will display power-off limitations.
ALTERNATE ENGINE DATA SOURCE ANNUNCIATIONS
If the G1000H is using alternate analog data sources to determine Q, MGT, NG, NP, or NR, a yellow ‘ALTN’
annunciation box will appear to the right of the PSI gauge. In addition, a yellow subscript ‘A’ will be shown with
the affected parameter readout(s) (Figure 3-6).
In the event an alternate analog data source is unavailable or invalid, a white ‘ALTN’ annunciation box is
shown to the right of the PSI gauge (Figure 3-6).
Alternate Source
Data In-Use for
Torque
Alternate Data Source InUse Annunciation
Alternate Data Source
Missing or Invalid
Figure 3-6 Alternate Engine Data Source Annunciations
If no valid data sources are available, a red ‘X’ is displayed instead of a readout, and any affected pointers will
be removed from the gauges.
86
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
3.3 ENGINE PAGE
NOTE: Refer to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for engine operating limitations and corrective actions.
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey on the MFD accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, electrical,
fuel, alerts, and power assurance calculations. To return to the previous softkey level and exit the Engine page,
press the ENGINE Softkey again, or press the CLR Key, or turn the large FMS Knob. The Engine Page is not
available in reversionary mode.
ENGINE
Press the ENGINE Softkey again
to return to the top level softkeys.
ENGINE
CAS
CAS
PWR CHK
HOV PWR
OGE
IGE
HOV-P
Figure 3-7 EIS Softkeys (MFD)
• ENGINE
CAS
CAS
PWR CHK
Displays the Engine page and softkeys; press again to return to the previous page
Scrolls up one message in the Alerts window on the MFD
Scrolls up one message in the Alerts window on the MFD
Performs a power assurance check
HOV PWR
Performs a Hover Performance Power Check
OGE
Performs a OGE (Out of Ground Effect) Hover Performance Power Check
IGE
Performs a IGE (In Ground Effect) Hover Performance Power Check
HOV-P
Enables Hover Prediction Mode
* Softkey disabled until 19 or more alerts are displayed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
87
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
MFD Alerts
window
containing CAS
messages
EIS Strip
Power Situation
Indicator
Dual
Tachometer
Engine Hour
Display
Figure 3-8 Engine Page Display (MFD)
ENGINE HOUR DISPLAY
The engine hours increment when the aircraft is in the air for more than 3 seconds and NR is greater than
70%. The engine hours stop incrementing when the aircraft is on the ground for more than 3 seconds or NR is
below 68% for more than 3 seconds.
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK
The G1000H can assist the pilot in performing a power assurance check to determine if installed specification
power can be achieved.
NOTE: Follow the procedures in the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for configuring the helicopter for the
power assurance check prior to activating the feature on the G1000H.
Performing a power assurance check:
1) If the Particle Separator or Snow Baffle are installed, proceed to step 2. If neither are installed, proceed to step
7.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup. If necessary, press the SETUP 1 Softkey to display the System
Setup 1 Page
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired option field in the Inlet Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob one click to the right to select ON or one click to the left to select OFF.
88
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
7) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
8) Press the PWR CHK Softkey.
When the power assurance check is activated a ‘PWR CHECK’ box is displayed containing a progress meter.
If the helicopter configuration for the power assurance check is invalid, the error message ‘CHK LIMITS’ is
displayed. Otherwise, the power assurance check will complete after ten seconds.
Values that equal or exceed performance minimums will be displayed in white; values that do not meet
performance minimums will be shown with yellow highlighted black readouts. Dashes are displayed if data
used to perform the power assurance check is not available.
HOVER PERFORMANCE
Pressing the HOV-P Softkey on the Engine Page displays the Hover Performance parameters. The Hover
Power Indicator (HPI) is displayed on the Power Situation Indicator (PSI) arc. The HPI is white when not in
Hover Prediction Mode, and cyan when in Hover Prediction Mode.
Out of Ground Effect
Out of Ground Effect
In Ground Effect
In Ground Effect
Hover Power Indicator
(Real Time)
Hover Power Indicator
(Hover Prediction Mode)
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
HOV PWR (Hover
Performance Power
Check) Softkey
Figure 3-9 Hover Power Indicator and Hover Performance
Parameters on the Engine Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
89
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
HOVER PERFORMANCE POWER CHECK
The Hover Performance Power Check displays the power required to perform an OGE (Out of Ground
Effect) or IGE (In Ground Effect) hover. The Hover Performance Power Check can be used in real time or
during pre-flight planning.
Pressing the HOV-P (Hover Prediction Mode) Softkey while HOV PWR is selected allows the pilot to edit
the hover performance parameters for pre-flight planning purposes. While in HOV-P (Hover Prediction
Mode), the Hover Power Indicator (HPI) and editable parameters are displayed in cyan, and the HOV PRED
annunciation is displayed in yellow.
If limit conditions are not satisfied, the respective parameters are displayed in yellow and, the CHK LIMIT
annunciation is displayed, and the hover performance calculation is not performed.
If wind conditions are not within the required range while performing a real time hover performance power
check, a yellow CHK WIND annunciation is displayed above the Power Situation Indicator. If wind conditions
are not within the required range while in Hover Prediction Mode, a yellow CHK WIND annunciation is
displayed above the hover performance parameters.
Real Time
Hover Prediction Mode
Figure 3-10 CHK WIND (Check Wind) Annunciation
90
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Performing a real time hover performance power check (out of ground effect):
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the EIS-Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey. The OGE (out of ground effect) Softkey is automatically selected by default.
3) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
HOV PWR (Hover
Performance Power
Check) Softkey
OGE (Out of Ground
Effect) Softkey
Figure 3-11 Real Time Hover Performance Power Check
(Out of Ground Effect)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
91
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Performing a real time hover performance power check (in ground effect):
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the EIS-Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey.
3) Press the IGE (in ground effect) Softkey.
4) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
HOV PWR (Hover
Performance Power
Check) Softkey
IGE (In Ground Effect)
Softkey
Figure 3-12 Real Time Hover Performance Power Check
(In Ground Effect)
92
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Performing a pre-flight planning hover performance power check (out of ground effect):
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the EIS-Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey. The OGE (out of ground effect) Softkey is automatically selected by default.
3) Press the HOV-P Softkey.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor on the first hover performance parameter.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired parameter.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the value.
7) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
HOV PRED (Hover
Prediction Mode)
Annunciation
Hover
Performance
Parameters
HOV PWR (Hover
Performance Power
Check) Softkey
Figure 3-13 Hover Prediction Mode (Out of Ground Effect)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
HOV-P (Hover Prediction
Mode) Softkey
OGE (Out of Ground
Effect) Softkey
93
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Performing a pre-flight planning hover performance power check (in ground effect):
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the EIS-Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey.
3) Press the IGE (in ground effect) Softkey.
4) Press the HOV-P Softkey.
5) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor on the first hover performance parameter.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired parameter.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the value.
8) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
HOV PRED (Hover
Prediction Mode)
Annunciation
Hover
Performance
Parameters
HOV PWR (Hover
Performance Power
Check) Softkey
Figure 3-14 Hover Prediction Mode (In Ground Effect)
HOV-P (Hover Prediction
Mode) Softkey
IGE (In Ground Effect)
Softkey
3.4 CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (CAS)
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, a CAS window containing messages appears to
the right of the vertical speed indicator on the PFD. Up to 12 messages can be displayed; when more than
12 messages accumulate, the CAS Softkey becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for
scrolling up and down through the messages in the PFD CAS Window.
94
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
In Reversionary Mode, the CAS Softkey takes the place of the INSET Softkey.
PFD CAS
Window
CAS Scrolling Softkey
(Disabled Until More
Than 14 Messages
are Displayed)
Figure 3-15 CAS Display (PFD)
CAS alerts are additionally displayed on the upper left of the EIS - Engine page. Up to 19 messages can be
shown; when more than 19 messages accumulate, the CAS and CAS Softkeys will become available as needed
to permit scrolling up and down through the messages on this page.
MFD Alerts
window
containing CAS
messages
CAS Scrolling Softkeys
(Disabled Until More
Than 19 Messages are
Displayed)
Figure 3-16 Engine Page CAS Display (MFD)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
95
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Information on CAS messages in this pilot’s guide is always superseded by the RFM. Refer to the RFM
for recommended pilot actions.
CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory, safe operating advisory) and sorted by
order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on
required action.
• Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and immediate crew action required; accompanied by one or
more aural tones; and a steady ‘WARNING’’ PBA light is illuminated above the PFD.
• Caution (yellow) – Immediate crew awareness and subsequent corrective action required; accompanied by a
steady ‘CAUTION’ PBA light is illuminated above the PFD.
• Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required.
• Safe Operating Advisory (green) – Crew awareness required.
A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged, or until the triggered condition is inactive
for more than three seconds.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist, at which point the message is removed.
NOTE: See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation Text
BATTERY HOT
ENGINE FIRE
Description
Audio Alert
Single Chime
Battery overheat detected.
Fire/Overheat detector senses a temperature greater than or equal to 338°F.
Continuous Chime
ENGINE OUT
ENGINE OVSPD
FADEC FAIL
XMSN OIL PRESS
XMSN OIL TEMP
Ng less than 55% or FADEC senses engine out.
Ng greater than 110% or NP vs torque is above maximum continuous limit.
Both the primary and reversionary channels have failed.
Transmission oil pressure is low.
Transmission oil overheat is detected.
Continuous Fast-Pulsing Chime
Single Chime
Repeating Ding-Dong Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
Table 3-1 Warning CAS Messages
96
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Annunciation Text
AP DEGRADED
AP FAILED
AUTOTRIM
BAGGAGE DOOR
BATTERY RLY
ENGINE CHIP
EXT PWR DOOR
FADEC DEGRADED
FADEC FAULT
FADEC MANUAL
FLOAT ARM
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LOW
FUEL VALVE
GEN FAIL
HEATER OVERTMP
HYDRAULIC SYS
L/FUEL BOOST
L/FUEL XFR
LITTER DOOR
MGT EXCEED
NG EXCEED
NG MISCOMP
NP EXCEED
NP MISCOMP
NR MISCOMP
PEDAL STOP
Q EXCEED
Q MISCOMP
R/FUEL BOOST
Description
A fault that prevents operation of some autopilot functions, such as loss or
degraded operation of an axis, loss of airspeed gain scheduling, stuck trim
beep switch, etc.
An autopilot fault related to the loss of a FCC channel, AHRS data, linear
actuator, or communication between involved LRUs.
The trim system is not responding to FCC commands.
Baggage door is not securely latched.
Battery relay energized when battery switch is off. Battery still connected to
DC bus.
Chip detector has detected debris in engine oil.
External power door not securely closed.
FADEC fault detected that may result in degraded engine performance.
A fault is recorded in the FADEC.
FADEC is in manual operating mode.
Floats Arm switch is in the armed position.
External fuel filter is partially blocked before impending bypass.
Fuel feed tank sensor indicates low fuel. 100 ± 10 pounds of fuel remain in
aft tank.
Fuel valve is in transition or is not in the commanded position.
Generator not connected to DC bus.
An over temperature condition has been detected either under the pilot’s seat,
copilot’s seat, or in the vertical tunnel.
Low pressure in hydraulic system.
Left fuel boost pump has failed.
Left fuel transfer pump has failed.
Litter door is not securely latched.
MGT is in exceedance.
Engine Ng is in exceedance.
Ng miscompare event.
Engine NP is in exceedance.
NP miscompare event.
NR miscompare event.
Pedal stop check or failed to engage or disengage upon command. Or, loss
of ADC inputs.
Engine torque is in exceedance.
Q miscompare event.
Right fuel boost pump has failed.
Audio Alert
Single Ping
Table 3-2 Caution CAS Messages
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
97
ENGINE INDICATION & CREW ALERTING SYSTEM
Annunciation Text
R/FUEL XFR
SLIDING DOOR
T/R CHIP
XMSN CHIP
Description
Right fuel transfer pump has failed.
Left or right Sliding Door not securely closed
T/R Chip Detector has detected debris.
Transmission Chip Detector has detected debris in transmission oil.
Audio Alert
Single Ping
Table 3-2 Caution CAS Messages
Annunciation Text
ALTN DATA FAIL
Description
Alternate engine data source is not available.
AUTO RELIGHT
Engine igniter is operating.
ENG ANTI-ICE
Engine Anti-Ice valve is open, pressure is high.
FADEC MAINT
FADEC lamp test failure during power-up self test and in flight.
INSTR FAN
Instrument panel area fan has failed.
LASER FIRE
Laser Fire operating.
NG OAT LIMIT
QUIET MODE SEL
RESTART FAULT
START
Engine Ng limited due to OAT.
Quiet Mode switch is in quiet position.
ECU fault will not allow start in AUTO (ECU) Mode.
Engine starter is engaged.
Table 3-3 Advisory CAS Messages
Annunciation Text
FLOAT TEST
LASER ARMED
QUIET MODE ON
WOG
Description
Float system is in test mode.
Laser Armed.
Engine Quiet Mode is on.
Aircraft is on the ground.
Table 3-4 Safe Operating Advisory CAS Messages
98
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the Bell 407 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• Audio Panel
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
99
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning Window
100
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by selecting the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter ADF frequencies and select ADF/DME modes,
enter transponder codes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is
present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in
the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
101
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
20
21
Figure 4-2 GMA 350H Audio Panel Controls
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
102
1
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal
is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
5
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
6
AUX – When selected, audio from the AUX inputs can be heard.
7
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel
Jack. Audio from a telephone device connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not
connected to the Front Panel Jack.
8
MUSIC – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio.
9
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, intercom squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 or COM3 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM2 or COM1/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
13
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM3 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM2 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
14
MIC3 – Selects the #3 transmitter for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 or COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM3 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
15
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom isolation.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between
crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting
during reception.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, MKR, AUX receiver audio and playback audio
can be heard on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key
flashes during PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing green or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source
(indicated by the flashing green or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active press
to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor,
once more to activate Blue-Select mode).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
103
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the MIC
Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission, audio from
the other COM radio is muted.
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (MIC1 or MIC2 Key).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
COM2 Radio is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
104
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when PTT is pressed, the active transceiver MIC Key Annunciator
flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception. Refer to
Additional Audio Panel Functions later in this section, and details on the Data Link Receiver in the Additional
Features Section.
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic COM squelch on and off.
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
105
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel MIC2 Key activates the transceiver.
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
106
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
107
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
108
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
Runway
Information
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
Press INFO-x Softkey
for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS,
FREQUENCIES, and
AOPA Data
109
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
110
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the system softkeys are blank.
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
111
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic COM Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing
good sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic COM Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When
Automatic COM Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over
the headsets and speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic COM Squelch.
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic COM
Squelch. Press again
to restore Automatic
COM Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic COM Squelch
COM VOLUME
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
112
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Standby
Fields
Active
Fields
Tuning Box
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME (optional) and Bearing Information windows and
using VOR as the source for the bearing pointer.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
113
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1,or NAV2 Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over the headset
and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
114
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
NAV VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
115
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
116
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Or:
1) When on the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the MENU Key to display the
page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
117
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
118
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
119
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
120
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Outer Marker
Indication
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Key on Audio Panel
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when the annunciator is off or when the
annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE
annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and
marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception (once to
mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
121
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADF/DME TUNING (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The system tunes the optional ADF receiver and DME transceiver. The ADF is tuned by entering the frequency
in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be labeled ADF/DME
or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the selection cursor
in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and the ENT Key.
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
DME
Tuning
Mode
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
122
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Select the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
‘0000.0’.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
123
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
124
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
DME
Modes
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Select the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
125
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – Transmits the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and
heading information periodically without requiring an interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, GND, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
126
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
XPDR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
Figure 4-35 Ground Mode
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
127
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
128
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-40 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
129
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
Figure 4-42 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
Press the IDENT
Softkey to Initiate
the ID Function
130
Figure 4-43 IDENT Softkey and Indication
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are optional for use in this aircraft.
INTERCOM
The GMA 350H includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), one MUSIC input, and one telephone/
entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger
audio isolation.
Figure 4-44 Intercom Controls
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to distribute as required. If the annunciators are lit, those
positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is isolated from the others.
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled and the copilot
headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio distribution.
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT Key
disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration between passenger
and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot Configured as Crew” is
heard.
INTERCOM MODES
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
NOTE: In the default ICS configuration, only the pilot and copilot positions can hear aircraft alerts.
NOTE: When in Split-COM mode, the copilot will only hear alerts and the higher numbered of the two
selected COMs (COM2 or COM3).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
131
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
All Intercom Mode
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft audio.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
COPLT
PASS
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
Pilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
COPLT
PASS
ICS Keys
132
Mode Operation
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Passenger/Crew Isolate Mode
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other. The
Passengers hear each other.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
ICS Keys
PASS
COPLT
Mode Operation
Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Pilot and
Passengers also hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
Aircraft Audio
COPLT
PILOT
PASS
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
All Isolate Mode
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use SplitCOM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
ICS Keys
190-01255-01 Rev. A
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
133
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pilot & Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers
hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
ICS Keys
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Pilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear
each other.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
ICS Keys
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Copilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot can hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has
the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
ICS Keys
134
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual intercom squelch adjustment for audio
sources that may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or
squelch. Turning the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing green annunciator or flashing
blue annunciator in Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after
a few seconds and the position of the cursor will always default back to the PILOT Key. Pressing the small
knob cancels the cursor.
Manual Intercom Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Intercom Squelch,
On for Manual Intercom Squelch
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
Volume or Manual
Intercom Squelch
Cursor
Figure 4-45 Volume/Squelch Control
Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
The music (MUSIC) and telephone/entertainment (
) audio are distributed using the Blue-Select Mode.
The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the telephone/entertainment
audio.
Figure 4-46 Blue-Select Mode (Music/Telephone Distribution)
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing green
annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first press
will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
The annunciator over the
Button will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue annunciator on
or off to distribute the telephone audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large knob to select
MUSIC, and select the crew/passenger positions to receive the music audio.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
135
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Selecting any button other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS , MUSIC or
will cancel Blue-Select Mode.
Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with no input,
the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
Adjusting Intercom Volume
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom volume for
the listener.
Adjusting Intercom Manual Squelch
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the
volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
Adjusting Speaker Volume
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected
sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). This will not affect Alert volume.
Adjusting MKR, AUX,
, and MUSIC Volume
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
volume of the selected source.
, or MUSIC, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed.
Figure 4-47 Speaker Key
Passenger Address Mode (PA Mode)
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode. PA Mode is annunciated
by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Push-toTalk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
configuration.
Split-PA Mode
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA
announcements. To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM Mode by pressing more that one MIC
Keys simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds.
136
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER (OPTIONAL)
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
An optional external Play button controls the play function. Pressing the Play button once plays the latest
recorded memory block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the optional Play button while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory
block. Each subsequent press of the Play button selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
MKR/MUTE
Key Stops Play
Figure 4-48 Marker Mute Key
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close together, interference may be heard
during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, AUX, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able to
monitor the higher numbered COM (COM2 or COM3).
Selection of more than one MIC Key selects Split COM operation (using COM1/COM2, COM1/COM3, or
COM2/COM3). The COM1/MIC1, COM2/MIC2, or COM3/MIC3 annunciators are illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. The selected COM frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again.
When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher
numbered COM. The MIC1 or MIC2 (depends on COMs selected for Split-COM) Annunciator flashes when
the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The MIC2 or MIC3 (depends on COMs selected for Split-COM)
Annunciator flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
137
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
Figure 4-49 Split COM Operation
3D AUDIO
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position.
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position. All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA 350H
assumes the pilot sits in the right seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default
configuration.
138
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Enabling 3D Audio
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When
3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right”
in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the
cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring
problem is suspected.
Symptom(s)
“3D audio left” message
heard in both ears.
“3D audio right” message
not heard
Cause(s)
1) Mono headset in use
Solution(s)
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
‘mono’
3) Aircraft wiring has left audio
wired to both left and right
channels of stereo headset jack
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
“3D audio left” message
heard in both ears,
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
both ears
1) Mono headset in use
2) Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
mono
3) Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right shorted together)
“3D audio right” message
heard in both ears. “3D
audio left” not heard
“3D audio left” message
heard in right ear only
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
left ear only
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right
channel used for mono instead
of left or left/right swapped)
1) Stereo headset is on backwards
2) Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right channels swapped)
“3D audio left” message
heard in left ear only, no
audio heard in right ear.
“3D audio right” message
heard in right ear only, no
audio heard in left ear
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
1) Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
on each side of the headset or the position of the
boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position information
will be swapped.
2) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
1) Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1) See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
headsets.
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right
channel used for mono instead
of left, or left/right swapped)
1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
3D Audio Troubleshooting
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
139
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VOICE RECOGNITION
Voice Recognition allows the pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GMA 350H using spoken commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold the Push-To-Command (PTC) button while speaking a command.
When the Push-To-Command button is released, the GMA 350H will respond. If a command is correctly interpreted by the GMA 350H, a positive acknowledgement chime will be played,
and the pilot should verify that the correct button selection is indicated by the triangular annunciator lights.
Alternatively, some commands will be indicated by a voice response from the GMA 350H. If the desired modes
are not indicated by annunciator lights or a voice response, the pilot should repeat the command by using the
Push-To-Command button, or by manually using the front panel controls of the GMA 350H.
If a command is incorrectly interpreted by the GMA 350H, a negative acknowledgement tone will be played. The pilot should repeat the command by using the Push-To-Command button, or by manually using the front
panel controls of the GMA 350H. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition operation, at any time the
front panel controls may be used manually to control the GMA 350H.
The following table lists the available Voice Recognition commands, the associated actions, and the voice
response if applicable:
Control
COM
Spoken Command
“COM one”
“MIC one”
“COM one MIC”
“COM two”
“MIC two”
“COM two MIC”
“COM three”
“MIC three”
“COM three MIC”
“Split COM”
“Split COM 1 2”
“Split COM 1 3”
“Split COM 2 3”
“Monitored COM mute” or
“Mute monitored COM”
NAV
AUX
140
“Disable monitored COM mute” or
“Monitored COM mute disable” or
“Disable mute monitored COM” or
“Mute monitored COM disable”
“NAV one”
“NAV two”
“AUX” or
“Auxiliary”
Action
Toggles COM1
Confirmation of Action
Illuminate/Extinguish COM1 Annunciator
Selects MIC1
Illuminate MIC1 Annunciator
Toggles COM2
Illuminate/Extinguish COM2 Annunciator
Selects MIC2
Illuminate MIC2 Annunciator
Toggles COM3
Illuminate/Extinguish COM3 Annunciator
Selects MIC3
Illuminate MIC3 Annunciator
Selects split COM 1/2
Selects split COM 1/2
Selects split COM 1/3
Selects split COM 2/3
Mutes monitored
COM on primary COM
reception
Illuminate MIC1/MIC2 Annunciators
Illuminate MIC1/MIC2 Annunciators
Illuminate MIC1/MIC3 Annunciators
Illuminate MIC2/MIC3 Annunciators
Voice Response:
“Monitor mute enabled”
Disables monitored
COM mute on primary
COM reception
Voice Response:
“Monitor mute disabled”
Toggles NAV1
Toggles NAV2
Illuminate/Extinguish NAV1 Annunciator
Illuminate/Extinguish NAV2 Annunciator
Toggles AUX
Illuminate/Extinguish AUX Annunciator
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Spoken Command
“Telephone” or
“Phone” or
“Jack”
“Telephone mute” or
“Phone mute” or
“Jack mute”or
“Mute telephone” or
“Mute phone” or
“Mute jack”
“Disable telephone mute” or
“Disable phone mute” or
“Disable jack mute”or
“Telephone mute disable”or
“Phone mute disable” or
“Jack mute disable”
“MUSIC”
MUSIC
ICS Isolation
Copilot
Configuration
190-01255-01 Rev. A
“MUSIC mute” or
“Mute MUSIC”
“Disable MUSIC mute” or
“MUSIC mute disable”
“Pilot”
“Copilot”
“Passenger” or
“Pass”
“Passenger mute” or
“Pass mute” or
“Mute passenger” or
“Mute pass”
“Disable passenger mute” or
“Disable pass mute” or
“Disable mute passenger” or
“Disable mute pass” or
“Passenger mute disable” or
“Pass mute disable” or
“Mute passenger disable” or
“Mute pass disable”
“Copilot is passenger” or
“Copilot is pass”
“Copilot is crew”
Action
Toggles Telephone/Jack
Confirmation of Action
Illuminate/Extinguish
Annunciator
Mutes Telephone/Jack
on radio reception
Voice Response:
“Tel and jack mute enabled”
Disables Telephone/Jack
mute on radio reception
Voice Response:
“Tel and jack mute disabled”
Illuminate/Extinguish MUSIC
Annunciator
Voice Response:
Mutes MUSIC on radio
reception
“Music mute enabled”
Voice Response:
Disables MUSIC mute
on radio reception
“Music mute disabled”
Toggles PILOT button Illuminate/Extinguish PILOT Annunciator
Toggles COPLT button Illuminate/Extinguish COPLT Annunciator
Toggles MUSIC
Toggles PASS button
Illuminate/Extinguish PASS Annunciator
Mutes passengers
during radio reception
Voice Response:
“Passenger mute enabled”
Disables muting of
passengers during radio
reception
Voice Response:
“Passenger mute disabled”
Configures Copilot as a
passenger
Configures Copilot as
flight crew
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
Voice Response:
“Copilot is passenger”
Voice Response:
“Copilot is crew”
141
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Manual
Squelch
Speaker
(SPKR)
PA
Spoken Command
Action
Confirmation of Action
“Manual squelch” or
Illuminate/Extinguish MAN SQ
Toggles manual squelch
Annunciator
“Man squelch”
“Manual squelch threshold up” or
“Manual squelch volume up” or
Increases manual
Manual squelch threshold increased
squelch threshold
“Man squelch threshold up” or
“Man squelch volume up”
“Manual squelch threshold down” or
“Manual squelch volume down” or
Decreases manual
Manual squelch threshold decreased
squelch threshold
“Man squelch threshold down” or
“Man squelch volume down”
NOTE: Finer manual squelch adjustment may be made using the dual concentric knobs on the GMA 350H.
The voice command “Up” or “Down” is equivalent to three clicks of the inner knob..
“Speaker”
Toggles SPKR on/off
Illuminate/Extinguish SPKR Annunciator
Toggles PA on/off
SPKR Annunciator blinks in PA mode
Marker Beacon audio
“Marker” or
Marker
on/off (refer to Marker
Illuminate/Extinguish MKR/MUTE
Beacon (MKR/
“Mute marker” or
Beacon section for
Annunciator
MUTE)
“Marker mute”
details)
Plays recorded
“Play” or
COM
clearance audio (refer
Clearance
“Read back” or
Recorded audio playing
to Clearance Recorder
Recorder
“Say again”
section for details)
Increases volume of
“(*Desired selection) volume up”
Volume of desired selection increased
desired selection
Decreases volume of
“(*Desired selection) volume down”
Volume of desired selection decreased
desired selection
Volume
Adjustments NOTE: Finer volume adjustment may be made using the dual concentric knobs on the GMA 350H. The
voice command “Up” or “Down” is equivalent to three click of the inner knob.
* Desired selection = “speaker”, “pilot”, “copilot”, “passenger”, “pass”, “marker”, “aux”, “auxiliary”,
“telephone”, “phone”, “jack”, or “music”.
“Distribute telephone to (**desired
position(s))” or
“Distribute phone to (**desired
Distributes TEL/JACK to
TEL/JACK audio heard at desired
position(s))” or
desired positions
position(s)
“Distribute jack to (**desired
Distribution
position(s))”
(Blue Mode)
“Distribute music to (**desired
Distributes MUSIC to
MUSIC heard at desired position(s)
position(s))”
desired position(s)
** Desired position(s) = “All”, “none”, “pilot”, “copilot”, “passenger”, “pass”, or any combination of
pilot, copilot, passenger, or pass.
142
“P - A”
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Cursor
Spoken Command
“Cursor off” or
“Cursor cancel” or
“Cancel cursor”
Confirmation of Action
Cancels cursor when
cursor is flashing
Cursor is removed
Voice Response:
“Three-D audio left, three-D audio right”
Voice Response:
Enables standard audio
“Standard audio”
(disables 3D audio)
“Standard Audio”
Voice Recognition Commands
“Three-D audio”
3D Audio
Action
Enables 3D audio
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The Audio Panel provides controls for one stereo music input and one stereo telephone/entertainment input.
1. The telephone/entertainment (
) Key controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to the rear
of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack.
2. The MUSIC Key controls the SiriusXM Radio audio input.
The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input (in which case, it operates
simultaneously with the rear telephone interface). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo jack that is compatible
with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3s, CD players, and cell phones. The headphone
outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
Distribution of the entertainment inputs is configured in Blue-Select Mode.
TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT INPUT
Telephone/entertainment (
distribution configured.
) input can be heard by the pilot, copilot, or the passengers based on the
SiriusXM RADIO AUDIO INPUT
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver (optional: requires subscription to SiriusXM Radio
Service) can be heard by the pilot, copilot, or the passengers based on the distribution configured. Refer to
the Additional Features section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
INPUT MUTING
Muting occurs when alerts, aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
143
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot.
If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM
transmissions.
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
for Manual Squelch
Volume or Manual
Squelch
Cursor
Intercom Annunciators
Figure 4-50 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT , COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
144
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The MIC1, MIC2 or MIC3 Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
Figure 4-51 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-52 COM Tuning Failure
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset (left ear only if stereo) and
microphone directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
145
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
146
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000H is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section
of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000H.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approaches are only available with
SBAS. L/VNAV approaches will be flown as an LNAV approach when SBAS is not available.
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower right corner
of the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Selecting the INSET Softkey again, then selecting the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
147
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Location of:
- Inset Map
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Rotorcraft Icon
at Present Position
Active Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
148
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Direct-to
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Left Holding Pattern
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
Right DME Arc
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
Left DME Arc
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
MFD Navigation Status Box
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
149
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
• Icons for enabled map features
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
150
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
Map Setup
Selection
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Select the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or select the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Select the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
151
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
Range Overzoom
Figure 5-6 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
152
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
153
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
Map Pointer Information
Map Pointer
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
154
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
155
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Information about
Airspace
Map Pointer on
Airspace
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
156
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
NAVAID
Information
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
157
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
Airspace
Information
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
158
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
Measurement Line
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
159
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
160
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
161
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
162
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Symbol
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
Highways and Roads
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
163
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
164
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
LAND DATA
On/Off
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
8) Select the desired range.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
165
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
166
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Select the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
167
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Least
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
168
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
169
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
170
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
TRACK VECTOR
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Track Vector
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
171
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Wind Vector On/Off
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
172
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
Range (radius)
Nav Range Ring
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
173
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
NOTE: The fuel range ring is intended as an aid to trip planning only, and may not provide the accuracy upon
which to solely base decisions on maximum flight range.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
174
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVt) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map.
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
175
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
176
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the system’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
177
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Identifier with
Duplicates
Duplicate
Waypoints
Duplicate Message
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
178
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
179
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
180
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO: Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The system provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
181
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’. The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
182
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
183
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT)
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
184
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Intersection Identifier
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
185
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Nearest
Intersection
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
186
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
187
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
188
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed
as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it i s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
189
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR
VOR Frequency
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
190
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
191
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Select the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
192
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
193
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
194
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
195
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
196
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
ADIZ
Warning Area
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
197
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Airspace Alerts Box
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
198
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
199
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD MSG Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
200
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
201
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
202
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
203
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
204
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
205
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
206
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Active heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
207
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
208
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
209
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Select the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
210
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
211
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
212
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
Flight Plan Full Message
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
213
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
214
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
215
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Airway Exit Points
Available
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
216
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header. ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
217
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
218
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
Departure Transition Points
Available
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
219
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
220
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
221
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Barometric Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
222
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Barometric Minimum
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
223
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
224
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, select the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Copy to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
225
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
226
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
227
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
228
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
229
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for the offset.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
230
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
231
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Activation Prompt
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- HYS-p
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
Original Track
Parallel Track
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
232
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
Active Status
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
233
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
3) Select the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Current
Active Leg
Selected Destination
Waypoint
Activate Leg Softkey
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
234
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).2)
Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
235
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
236
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
237
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
238
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
239
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to entry the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint and activate
the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
240
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
241
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint selection
Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
242
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: The system supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
The system system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
Enabled (valid data)
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
243
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
After VNV Direct-to
VNV PROF Softkey
Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
244
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Cyan Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Cyan Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Cyan Subdued
Text
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
245
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
White Text
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are not “auto-designated”. This means the system
does not automatically use the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and
deviation guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as white text. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that are not designated for use in vertical guidance can be “designated” using the ENT Key. The
altitude is now displayed as cyan text and is used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may
change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a designated
altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
246
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
WAAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
247
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
248
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
DEPARTURES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
249
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Departure Airport
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
Figure 5-95 Departure Selection
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-96 Departure Loading
250
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-1/2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
251
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Destination Airport
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
Figure 5-97 Arrival Selection
252
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-98 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO-1/2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
253
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
254
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
(available only if minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
(available only if
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Approach Type
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
255
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, ‘TEMP COMP’, or ‘RAD ALT’ and press the ENT
Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Destination Airport
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-99 Approach Selection
256
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Loaded Approach
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-100 Approach Loading
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the small
FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach
is previewed on the map.
Or:
a) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
257
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, ‘TEMP COMP’, or ‘RAD ALT’ and press the ENT
Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
258
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
Press the Go Around Button.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
259
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
Temperature compensated altitudes can be computed and used for a loaded approach. A temperature
compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Enabling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
Figure 5-101 Temperature Compensation
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
Figure 5-102 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
260
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Disabling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
261
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-104 Course to Altitude
262
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-105 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
263
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. • Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
264
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg. • Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
265
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Select the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) Select the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) Select the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
266
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WEIGHT AND BALANCE PLANNING
NOTE: All weight & balance page data fields display data rounded to the nearest 5 pounds or 5 kilograms.
Aircraft Weight & Balance
Calculator
Current Lateral CG
Zero Fuel Weight Calculation Fuel On Board Entry Takeoff Weight Calculation Hook Weight Entry Gross Weight Calculation Longitudinal Station CG Calculation Lateral Station CG Calculation -
Aircraft Load Calculator
- Lateral CG Slider Gauge
- Longitudinal CG Slider Gauge
- Copilot Arm/Weight Entry
- Pilot Arm/Weight Entry
- LH FWD Position Arm/Weight Entry
- RH FWD Position Arm/Weight Entry
- LH AFT Position Arm/Weight Entry
- MID AFT Position Arm/Weight Entry
- RH AFT Position Arm/Weight Entry
- Baggage Arm/Weight Entry
Estimated Weight Calculator
Est. Landing Weight Calculation Est. Landing Fuel Calculation Fuel Reserves Entry Excess Fuel Calculation -
Predicted CG Movement due to
Fuel Burn
Current Longitudinal CG
Hook Weight Softkey
Fuel on Board Sync Softkey
Confirm Weight &
Balance Softkey
Weight & Balance
Configuration Softkey
Figure 5-108 Weight & Balance Page
Basic Empty Weight
Basic Empty Weight CG
(Calculated based on items
listed as present)
- Longitudinal CG Station
- Lateral CG Station
- Longitudinal CG Moment
- Lateral CG Moment
(Calculated based on items
listed as present)
Aircraft Data Weight Items
Item Present Yes/No Item Title Item Weight Item Arm Item Butt Line -
Go Back Softkey
Defaults Softkey
Figure 5-109 Weight & Balance Configuration Page
The AIRCRAFT DATA item weights on the Weight & Balance Configuration Page are included in the zero fuel
weight, but do not change the similar AIRCRAFT LOAD weights on the Weight & Balance Page. The AIRCRAFT
DATA items correspond to actual installed hardware (e.g. Seat, Cargo Bin, Litter, etc.) The AIRCRAFT LOAD
entries indicate the crew, passengers, or baggage occupying those locations.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
267
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Modifying basic empty weight:
1) Select the W&B CFG Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Weight & Balance Configuration’, and press
the ENT Key to display the Weight & Balance Configuration Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘ARCRFT’ or ‘ENG OIL’
weight.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the weight. The new weight will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight
shown at the top of the page.
4) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the AUX - WEIGHT & BALANCE Page.
The ‘BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT” is calculated by summing the weights of all items marked as present.
Entering the aircraft load weights:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘PILOT’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the weight.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry and move the cursor to the next field.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘ZERO FUEL WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the aircraft load weights.
Entering the fuel on board weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL ON BOARD’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
Press the FOB SYNC Softkey. The fuel on board weight is set to the current measured fuel weight.
The ‘TAKEOFF WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight and the confirmed fuel on board weight
(static value confirmed by the pilot).
Entering the hook weight:
1) Select the HOOK WT Softkey to activate the cursor on the ‘HOOK WEIGHT’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the hook weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘GROSS WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight, the hook weight, and the current fuel on
board (updated based on fuel flow).
268
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering the fuel reserve weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL RESERVES’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
The AIRCRAFT LOAD can be customized for a desired configuration.
Setting up a litter configuration (starting from the standard configuration):
1) Select the W&B CFG Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Weight & Balance Configuration’, and press
the ENT Key to display the Weight & Balance Configuration Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CPLT’ PRESENT field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘NO’. The new
weight will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight shown at the top of the page.
4) Repeat step 3 for ‘LH FWD’ and ‘LH AFT’. There is now space for the litter.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘LITTER’ PRESENT field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘YES’. The new weight will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight shown at
the top of the page.
7) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the AUX - WEIGHT & BALANCE Page. The litter configuration will be
shown in the AIRCRAFT LOAD window.
Litter Position
Arm/Weight Entry
Executive
Configuration
Figure 5-110 Weight & Balance Page - Litter and Executive Configurations
Setting up an executive configuration (starting from the standard configuration):
1) Select the W&B CFG Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Weight & Balance Configuration’, and press
the ENT Key to display the Weight & Balance Configuration Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
269
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘MID AFT’ PRESENT field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘NO’. The
new weight will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight shown at the top of the page.
4) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the AUX - WEIGHT & BALANCE Page. The executive configuration will
be shown in the AIRCRAFT LOAD window.
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• ‘EST LANDING WEIGHT’ = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
• ‘EST LANDING FUEL’ = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• ‘EXCESS FUEL’ = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of four dashes:
• ‘EST LANDING WEIGHT’
• ‘EST LANDING FUEL’
• ‘EXCESS FUEL’
WEIGHT AND BALANCE CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
If the ‘ZERO FUEL WEIGHT’ is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel
weight is displayed in yellow.
If the ‘GROSS WEIGHT’ is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the gross weight is
displayed in yellow.
If the ‘EST LANDING WEIGHT’ is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing fuel weight is displayed in yellow.
If the ‘EST LANDING FUEL’ weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in yellow:
• ‘EST LANDING FUEL’ weight
• ‘EXCESS FUEL’ weight
If the ‘EST LANDING FUEL’ weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
• ‘EST LANDING FUEL’ weight
• ‘EXCESS FUEL’ weight
If the ‘LON STA’ is outside the specified CG envelope, then the longitudinal station value is displayed in red,
and the longitudinal CG Slider Gauge outline will be red.
If the expected fuel burn will place the ‘LON STA’ outside of the specified CG envelope, then the longitudinal
station value is displayed in yellow, and the longitudinal CG Slider Gauge outline will be yellow.
If the ‘LAT STA’ is outside the specified CG envelope, then the lateral station value is displayed in red, and the
lateral CG Slider Gauge outline will be red.
If the expected fuel burn will place the ‘LAT STA’ outside of the specified CG envelope, then the lateral station
value is displayed in yellow, and the lateral CG Slider Gauge outline will be yellow.
270
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-111 RAIM Prediction
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
271
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-112 SBAS Display - Active
272
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-113 SBAS Display - Disabled
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
273
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while the
system provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-114 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-114 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
Figure 5-114 Assigned Heading of 240º
274
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-115.
Figure 5-115 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
275
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-116. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
Figure 5-116 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-117.
Figure 5-117 Entering V4 Entry Point
276
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-118.
Figure 5-118 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-118, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-119.
Figure 5-119 List of Available Airways for TOP
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-119.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
277
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-120.
Figure 5-120 List of Available Exits for V4
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-120.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-121.
Figure 5-121 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
278
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-122.
Figure 5-122 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
c) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-123. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
Figure 5-123 Comfirm Active Leg
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
279
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-124, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
Figure 5-124 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
280
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-125.
Figure 5-125 Turn on to Active Leg
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-126.
Figure 5-126 Turn to Intercept V244
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
281
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) As seen in Figure 5-127, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
Figure 5-127 V244 Now Active Leg
282
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-128.
Figure 5-128 HYS to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
c) Press the Direct-to (
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-129.
Figure 5-129 Direct To OPSHN
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
283
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-130.
Figure 5-130 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-131.
Figure 5-131 Enter VNV Offset Distance
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
284
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-132, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Figure 5-132 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
285
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-133.
Figure 5-133 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-134.
Figure 5-134 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-134.
286
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-135.
Figure 5-135 List of Available Transitions
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
287
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 Barometric Minimums Set
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-137.
Figure 5-137 Loaded Approach
288
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-138. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as white text, indicating these values are “not
designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
Note: To use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the ENT Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the each altitude “designated”, it is displayed as cyan text.
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-138.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
Figure 5-138 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
289
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-139.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-139 Adjusting the Descent
c) Press the ENT Key.
290
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
15) As seen in Figure 5-140, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-141. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
Figure 5-140 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
Target Altitude
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
Figure 5-141 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
291
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-142.
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Figure 5-142 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-143.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
Figure 5-143 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
292
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-144. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
Figure 5-144 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
293
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-145. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-145 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-146). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
294
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-146 Approaching PYNON
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
295
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-147).
Figure 5-147 Approach is Now Active
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-148.
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
Figure 5-148 Manually Activate Approach
296
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
Figure 5-149 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
297
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-150) when the final approach course becomes active.
Figure 5-150 Descending to the FAF
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-150.
298
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-151.
Figure 5-151 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
299
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-152.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
Figure 5-152 Missed Approach Active
300
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-153.
Figure 5-153 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-154.
Figure 5-154 Hold Established
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
301
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-155. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-155. The CDI deviation bar
is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/WAAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-155.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all
nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
302
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Distance &
Bearing
Current
Track
Indicator)
Ground
Speed
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Subdued
Rotorcraft
Symbol
Figure 5-155 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
303
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
304
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The G1000H hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory information of potential hazards to
flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
This section is divided into the following groups:
Weather
• GDL 69H/69AH SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56H Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
• Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS)
Traffic
• TIS (Traffic Information Service)
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
305
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
The Garmin GDL 69H/69AH is a remote-mounted satellite data link receiver. It provides SiriusXM Weather
data to the system. The system displays graphical weather information and associated text on the Multi Function
Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69AH can also receive SiriusXM
Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio entertainment programming operate in the
S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
Services from SiriusXM require active subscriptions. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer service
the coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69H/69AH. The SiriusXM Weather service has a coded Data Radio
ID. The Data Radio ID must be provided to activate the weather service. This ID is in the following locations:
• The AUX - XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the GDL 69H/69AH.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website.
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and desired weather product subscription package.
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) After a SiriusXM account has been established, position the aircraft outside and ensure the GDL 69H/69AH
antenna has a clear view of the sky.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
306
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Observe the list of Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for weather products in the chosen subscription package to become available.
5) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the chosen SiriusXM
Weather product subscription package, press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio)
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Weather Products
(Available Products
for Service Class
Indicated in Green)
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map page for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the Map
Page Group. This is the only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather
products.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
3) If the page title contains ‘CNXT’, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source from Garmin
Connext to SiriusXM Weather. Refer to the next procedure to change the source.
Changing the weather data link source (SiriusXM or Garmin Connext):
1) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
3) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-2).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
307
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’ or ‘Display Connext Weather’ and press
the ENT Key. Weather Data Link Page title and softkeys change to correspond to selected data link weather
source.
Figure 6-2 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
NEXRAD Weather
Product Icon
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product which can be shown as a map overlay, the system displays a
weather product icon and product age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data
provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information
contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
The weather product icon and age appear for weather products enabled and shown on the Weather Data
Link (XM) Page. The weather product icon and age can be enabled/disabled for weather products enabled and
shown on the PFD Inset Map.
308
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Weather Product Information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey to display or remove weather product info and age data when a data link weather
product is selected for display on the PFD Inset Map.
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Broadcast Rate intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
309
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
60
15
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
30
XM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
30
No Radar Coverage
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs)
30
60
90
90
60
120
90
60
60
no product image
no product image
no product image
7.5
5
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
5
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
60
60
5
12
12
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
310
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Flight Plan Pages
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
METARs
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+*
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
* Winds Aloft information available inside the Profile View Window on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
311
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-4
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
ENGINE
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
OFF
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
LEGEND
BACK
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Weather Product Softkeys
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
312
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-5).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
Figure 6-6 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
313
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-8).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-9).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-9 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page. Viewing legends for displayed weather products:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
314
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Echo Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
• METARs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
Flash Flood
Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
Figure 6-10 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
315
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as turbulence, icing, or terrain.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (XM) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
316
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-12), select the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data with Legend
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
317
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-13).
Block Area is 4 km2
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
318
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed because it is unknown.
No Coverage Above 55ºN
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as
Mixed
Figure 6-14 NEXRAD Data - Canada
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
319
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: Display of Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-15) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the actual top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude
at which the NEXRAD radar system detects precipitation.
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Data
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the ECHO TOP Softkey.
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-16), select the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-16 Echo Tops Legend
320
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-17) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Data
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the CLD TOP Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-18), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-18 Cloud Tops Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
321
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
Lightning data (Figure 6-19) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike
icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed.
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-19 Lightning Data
SiriusXM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (XM) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page).
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-20), select the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-20 Lightning Legend
322
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL MOVEMENT
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-21) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
Storm Cells
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be
displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
•Navigation Map
• Nearest Pages
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up XM Satellite Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-22), select the
LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
Figure 6-22 Cell Movement Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
323
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms.
AIRMET Mountain
Obscuration
AIRMET Icing
AIRMET Turbulence
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-24 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-25), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-24 Sample SIGMET Text
324
Figure 6-25 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
Selected Airport
Figure 6-26 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in
a decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Turn the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
325
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-27 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Raw METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page on
which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD. A METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available for that waypoint.
Displaying raw METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
326
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-28), select the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain enough information to determine the METAR category.
Figure 6-28 METAR Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
327
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-29 24-Hour Surface Analysis and City Forecast Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-30), select the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-30 Surface Analysis Legend
328
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVELS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-31). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-32), select the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-32 Freezing Level Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
329
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-33) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the WIND Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data at 3,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-34), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-35). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
330
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft Product
Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrow
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Weather Product on
Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Enabling/Disabling Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
331
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-37).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘PROFILE WINDS’ (Figure 6-38).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
332
Figure 6-38 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
County data (Figure 6-39) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Flood
Warning
Figure 6-39 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-40), select the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-40 County Warnings Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
333
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-41) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks.
Cyclone
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the CYCLONE Softkey.
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-42), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
Figure 6-42 Cyclone Legend
334
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-43). Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
SLD
Threat
Icing
Potential
Figure 6-43 Icing Data at 6,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-44), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-44 Icing Potential Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
335
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
Turbulence data (Figure 6-45) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Moderate
Turbulence
Light
Turbulence
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-46), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
Figure 6-46 Turbulence Legend
336
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. When significant weather
conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP
may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind
shear, turbulence, and type of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commercial
airlines.
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
Routine
PIREP
Selected
AIREP
Figure 6-47 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
337
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Age of report in HH:MM
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
Raw PIREP Text
Figure 6-48 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-49), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-49 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
338
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext weather products varies by region and is subject to
change. For weather product coverage information, refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather. This
Pilot’s Guide shows all Garmin Connext Weather products, regardless of product availability in a specific
area.
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite data link receiver provides extensive weather information to the G1000H. The system displays graphical weather information and its associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the flight crew selects either a manual or automatic Connext
Data Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
Garmin Connext Weather requires an active subscription to both Iridium and Garmin Connext services. Refer
to the Additional Features section for information on registering for Garmin Connext services.
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map for viewing Garmin Connext Weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-50). This is the only map display capable of showing information for all
available Garmin Connext Weather products. No weather data is displayed until the system completes the first
crew-initiated Connext Data Request.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT or XM) Page. If the page title contains
‘XM’, refer to the following procedure to change the data link weather source from SiriusXM to Garmin
Connxext.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
339
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather
product age
information
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
Precip Weather
Product Selected
for Display
Figure 6-50 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After Connext Data Request)
Changing the weather data link source (SiriusXM or Garmin Connext):
1) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
3) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-51).
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’ or ‘Display Connext Weather’ and press
the ENT Key. Weather Data Link Page title and softkeys change to correspond to selected data link weather
source.
Figure 6-51 Changing the Data
Link Weather Source
When a weather product is selected for display on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, a box containing a
symbol for the product and its age (in minutes) are shown in the upper right (Figure 6-50). If weather data has
340
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
not been requested yet or is not available, ‘N/A’ is shown next to the product symbol instead of age. The age of
the weather product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and
the current GPS time.
Weather products are updated continuously or refreshed at specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate
column in Table 6-4).
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the defined Expiration Time intervals (see Table
6-4), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. The age of the expired product is replaced
by dashes. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age changes to yellow.
As an additional reference, the Garmin Connext Weather product symbol and age can be enabled/disabled
for display on the PFD Inset Map.
Enabling/Disabling SiriusXM Weather Product Information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey to display or remove product symbol and age data when a Garmin Connext
Weather product is selected for display on the PFD Inset Map.
Table 6-4 shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based infrastructure makes
available the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content
is received from weather sources.
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region and is subject to
change. For weather product coverage information, refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather. This
Pilot’s Guide shows all Garmin Connext Weather products, regardless of product availability in a specific
area.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
341
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Symbol
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
30
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
60
30
30
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take
between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-4 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning (LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
342
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Navigation Map Page
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
Table 6-4 shows which Garmin Connext Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on
specific G1000H maps.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Weather Information
Page
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages
METARs
Navigation Map Page
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
PIREPs
+
+
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
+
Table 6-5 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-52 shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page). When a weather product
is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product display is
enabled.
PRECIP
ENGINE
IR SAT
DL LTNG
SIG/AIR
WIND OFF
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
Figure 6-52 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Weather Product Softkeys (MFD)
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
343
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-53).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-54).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, maximum range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-53 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-54 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
344
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The G1000H supports dual datalink installation of both the GSR56H for Garmin Connext Weather and the
GDL69AH for SiriusXM Weather products. Only one set of data link weather products (Garmin Connext or
SiriusXM Weather) can be displayed at a time.
If both Garmin Connext and SiriusXM weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the
corresponding weather products shown in Table 6-5 will result in identical settings for both services.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Precipitation
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
(PRECIP)
Cloud Top
Infrared Satellite
(CLD TOP)
(IR SAT)
SiriusXM Lightning
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-6 Corresponding SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather
Products
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-55).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-56).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-57).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
345
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-55 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-56 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the LEGEND Softkey will be unavailable. Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
346
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional Information on
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-58 Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the flight crew with the options to define the requested weather
coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel weather
data requests. A ‘REQUEST STATUS’ window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data Request.
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all currently
available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s present position
or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field) must be part of
the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘INVALID COVERAGE AREA’ and the
system will not allow a request to occur.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a flight
plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-59).
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-60, 6-61):
• PRESENT POSITION – Requests data based on current location.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
347
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• DESTINATION – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired
flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘REMAINING FPL’ to request weather data for the remainder
of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
• WAYPOINT – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘DIAMETER / RTE WIDTH’ (diameter/route width) distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘SEND REQ’ button is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
Figure 6-59 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-60 Connext Data Request Menu
348
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
Figure 6-61 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation and Infrared Satellite Displayed
During a Connext Data Request, the REQUEST STATUS Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once a connection is established, the REQUEST STATUS Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time
Remaining:” with an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data
Request Menu may be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request
will continue to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to
complete depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present,
and the Iridium signal strength.
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the REQUEST STATUS Window indicates ‘OK’ if the
Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
349
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL REQ’ and press the ENT Key. The request status box indicates
‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is cycled. The REQUEST STATUS Window will
indicate a countdown timer until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Weather Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘UPDATE RATE’ setting. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (OFF, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then
press the ENT Key.
6) The ‘SEND REQ” button is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘REQUEST STATUS’ based
on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data
Request.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
350
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
PRECIPITATION
The Precipitation weather product, where available, shows a mosaic of weather radar images compiled from
individual radar sites. Images may arrive at ground-based collection systems at different rates and times.
Periodically, the Garmin Connext Weather service collects these images, and assigns a single time to indicate
when it created the image. This composite image becomes the Precipitation weather product. Images from
individual radar sites differ in age, and are always older than the displayed Precipitation weather product age.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
Boundary of
Precipitation data
request
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-62 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Precipitation data can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
351
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
Radar data shown represents lowest level, base reflectivity, of radar returns. The display of the information
is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation legend (Figure 6-63), select the LEGEND Softkey when
Precipitation is selected for display.
No Radar Coverage
Boundary of Connext
Data Request
Figure 6-63 Precipitation Data Legend
The display of No Radar Coverage is enabled when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line with white tick marks depicts the selected coverage area of the Connext Data
Request. This boundary encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
352
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or
precipitation characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet
snow, wet hail, and rain.
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers.
Block represents
4 km2
Figure 6-64 Precipitation Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
353
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INFRARED SATELLITE
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) data (Figure 6-65) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter
cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
When the Map Pointer is activated and panning over an area of displayed cloud tops, the system shows a
range of cloud top temperatures for the selected location.
Figure 6-65 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-66), select the LEGEND Softkey when Infrared Satellite data
is selected for display.
Figure 6-66 Infrared Satellite Legend
354
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DATALINK LIGHTNING
Datalink Lightning (DL LTNG) data (Figure 6-67) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. Neither
cloud-to-cloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
Lightning Strikes
Figure 6-67 Data Link Lightning
Datalink Lightning data displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
Displaying Datalink Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the DL LTNG Softkey.
To display the Datalink Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-68), select the
LEGEND Softkey when Datalink Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-68 Data Link Lightning Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
355
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is displayed as long as any portion of it is issued within the coverage area
of the Connext Data Request.
Instructions for Viewing
SIGMET/AIRMET Text
SIGMET
Figure 6-69 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-70 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-71), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-70 Sample SIGMET Text
356
Figure 6-71 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
Selected
Airport
Figure 6-72 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. TAF information is displayed in its
raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, select the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
357
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-73 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Raw METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page on
which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD. A METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available for that waypoint.
Displaying raw METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
358
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-74), select the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-74 METAR Legend
WINDS ALOFT
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-75) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-75 Winds Aloft at 3,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-76), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
359
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-76 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-77). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
Winds Aloft Product
Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrow
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-77 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Weather Product on
Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-7.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-7 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
360
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-78).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-79).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘PROFILE WINDS’ (Figure 6-80).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-78 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-79 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Figure 6-80 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
361
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
Urgent
PIREP
PIREP
Selected
Figure 6-81 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP tex is first displayed in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
362
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
Original PIREP Text
Figure 6-82 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-83), select the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-83 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
363
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
If the G1000H cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request
status window.
Weather Request
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request
to reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error
[2]
Connext Comm Error
[4]
Connext Comm Error
[5]
Connext Comm Error
[6]
Connext Comm Error
[7]
Connext Comm Error
[8]
Connext Login Invalid
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A communications error has occurred with the GDL59H or GIA. The G1000H should be serviced.
This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GDL 59 or a GIA
is off-line.
This can occur if the GDL 59H is off-line or not configured, or the Iridium or Connext systems are
not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this error persists, the G1000H should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the G1000H should be serviced.
A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in
the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135 for assistance.
Connext Server
The Garmin Connext ground-based weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected
Temporarily Inop
to return to service in less than 30 minutes.
Connext Server Inop
The Garmin Connext weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a waypoint,
a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is enabled
(checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
No Connext
The system is not be currently subscribed to the Garmin Connext Weather service, or the access
Subscription
code is incorrect. Verify the access code. Contact at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913397-8200, ext. 1135 for assistance.
Reduce Request Area
The Connext Data Request request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage area and
re-send data request.
Request Cancelled
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
Requested area too
The size of the Connext Data Request has exceeded limits. Reduce the size of the coverage area and
large. Reduce coverage try the weather data request again.
area.
Request Failed - Try
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Again
Transfer Preempted
The GDL 59H is busy. Retry request later.
Table 6-8 Abnormal Garmin Connext Request Status Messages
364
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The G1000H also displays message advisories on the PFD which may indicate a problem with the GDL 59H;
refer to Appendix A for more information.
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
When the G1000H is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD Inset map will be available for display (see Table 6-4 for a list of weather products and their
associated map availability). If manual weather data requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new Garmin Connext
Weather data can be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests
were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in
Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
365
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 STORMSCOPE
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
information from data link lightning sources.
The MAP - Stormscope Page is the principal map page for viewing Stormscope data. The following pages can
also display Stormscope data as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
To display Stormscope data on any map besides the Stormscope Page, select the MAP Softkey (or the INSET
Softkey for the PFD Inset Map), then select the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data
using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-9.
Lightning Age
Symbol
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-9 Lightning Age and Symbols
366
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-84), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections (Figure 6-85).
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-87).
The following options are available (Figure 6-86):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning information.
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Figure 6-86 Map Setup Menu
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
367
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-87). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Stormscope
Enabled Icon
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope
Lightning Information Enabled
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-88).
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-88 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
368
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North Up orientation) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in Track Up orientation at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning
data can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North Up orientation
shows all the data.
NOTE: The system removes Stormscope Lightning information from the displays at a map range of less than
25 nm, however lightning cells or strikes may still be present.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in. SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
369
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope
Lightning Strike
Rate
Stormscope
Operating
Mode
Range Marking
Indications
Figure 6-89 Stormscope Page
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Select the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options.
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-90). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data (on the Stormscope Page):
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Clear Lightning Data’ (Figure 6-90).
370
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the CLEAR Softkey.
Figure 6-90 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or select the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘View Arc’ and ‘View 360˚ options.
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
371
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 HTAWS
WARNING: Do not use HTAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. HTAWS is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: The data contained in the HTAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
region.
HTAWS (Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is designed to increase situational awareness
and aid in preventing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) accidents. HTAWS provides visual annunciations
and voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The visual
annunciations and voice alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only.
HTAWS satisfies TSO-C194 requirements for certification.
HTAWS requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain and obstacle database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HTAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed
information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and the data may still contain inaccuracies.
HTAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude,
along with additional altitude input from an optional radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height
above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system uses GSL altitude to determine HTAWS alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature
that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine
MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and
reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by HTAWS are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, HTAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, HTAWS can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
HTAWS incorporates altitude input from an optional radar altimeter for certain alerts.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
372
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude.
DISPLAYING HTAWS DATA
HTAWS uses colors to depict terrain and obstacles relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically
as the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-91 and Tables 6-10 and 6-11 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Red
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Terrain is more than
250 ft above the
aircraft altitude
Terrain is between 250
Orange ft and 0 ft above the
aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
Terrain is between 0 ft
Yellow and 250 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Terrain is between 250
Green ft and 500 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft
Black
Terrain is more
than 500 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-91 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for HTAWS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is at or above current aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 0’ and 250’
below current aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is 250’ or more below
current aircraft altitude
Table 6-10 HTAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example
Annunciation
Warning
Caution
Table 6-11 HTAWS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
373
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Map - HTAWS Page is the principal map page for viewing HTAWS information. HTAWS information can
be also displayed on the following maps and pages as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the HTAWS Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When HTAWS is selected on maps other than the HTAWS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for HTAWS terrain colors are shown. The legend appears without the icon on the HTAWS
Page.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
Maps besides the HTAWS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-94).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
374
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HTAWS PAGE
The MAP - HTAWS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing HTAWS
information. Aviation data (airports/heliports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an
obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest
potential point of impact on the HTAWS Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the HTAWS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select HTAWS Page.
Changing the HTAWS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
375
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the HTAWS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft GPSderived GSL Altitude
Obstacles
Map Range Rings
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-95 HTAWS Page (360 View)
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft GPSderived GSL Altitude
Map Range Arc
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-96 HTAWS Page (ARC View)
376
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
HTAWS ALERTS
The system issues alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within HTAWS software
algorithms. HTAWS alerts employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued,
the system displays visual annunciations and issues voice alerts. Table 6-12 shows HTAWS alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The HTAWS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the HTAWS Page or
Navigation Map Page (if terrain display is enabled) on the MFD. If the HTAWS Page is not displayed at the time,
a pop-up alert appears in the lower-right corner of the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the HTAWS Page)
Potential Impact
Point Caution
MFD Pop-Up Alert
Alert Annunciation
Potential Impact Point Caution
Figure 6-97 HTAWS Alert Annunciations
Potential Impact
Point
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-98 HTAWS Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
377
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/HTAWS
MFD
Page Alert Pop-Up Alert (except
Annunciation
HTAWS Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Voice Callout (VCO)
None
None
“Five Hundred”, “Four Hundred”, “Three Hundred”,
“Two Hundred”, “One Fifty”, “One Hundred”, “Fifty”
Table 6-12 HTAWS Alerts Summary
HTAWS caution voice alerts can be muted while an alert is occurring. Muting an active caution voice alert
has no effect on visual caution annunciations or warning voice alerts. Muting becomes disabled if a new
HTAWS caution occurs.
Muting/Unmuting an Active HTAWS Caution Voice Alert:
Press the TA MUTE button on the collective.
Or:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the HTAWS Page on the MFD.
2) Press the MUTE CTN Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Mute Active Caution’ or ‘Unmute Active Caution’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT
Key.
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-99. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
HTAWS Page.
378
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the HTAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-99.
Required
Terrain/Obstacle
Clearance
Required
Terrain Clearance
400
Required
Terrain
(FT)
Required
TerrainClearance
Clearance (FT)
350
300
250
200
150
100
RTC Level (FT)
50
RTC Descending (FT)
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway/Helipad (NM)
Figure 6-99 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
In situations when reduced FLTA alerting sensitivity may be desired, such as in low-level operations or
during off-airport landings, HTAWS offers a Reduced Protection (RP) Mode. When RP Mode is enabled, the
following occur:
• RTC is reduced to a maximum of 125 feet when groundspeed is at least 60 knots; RTC is reduced to zero
feet at less than 60 knots.
• HTAWS reduces the distance of the projected flight path used to scan for terrain and obstacles.
• HTAWS disables visual and caution voice alerts.
When RP Mode is enabled, the system status annunciation ‘RP MODE’ is shown on the PFD and on the
HTAWS Page of the MFD.
Figure 6-100 Reduced Protection Mode Enabled
System Status Annunciation
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
379
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling RP Mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the HTAWS Page.
2) Press the RP MODE Softkey to inhibit or enable RP Mode (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Reduce Protection’ or ‘Enable Full Protection’ (choice dependent on current state)
and press the ENT Key.
FLTA caution and warning alerts are automatically inhibited in any the following circumstances to reduce
nuisance alerts:
• The groundspeed is less than 30 knots.
• The aircraft is operating within a region of a published ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV or LNAV+V approach within
a defined descent path.
• The aircraft is in the vicinity of runways or a helipad.
HTAWS FLTA alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting these alerts, as
the system should be enabled when appropriate. When HTAWS is inhibited, the system status annunciation
‘HTAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and on the HTAWS Page of the MFD (Figure 6-101).
Figure 6-101 HTAWS Alerting Disabled
(HTAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling FLTA alerting:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the HTAWS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable HTAWS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Inhibit HTAWS’ or ‘Enable HTAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press
the ENT Key.
If HTAWS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
380
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT ALERTS
HTAWS provides altitude voice callout alerts (VCO) as the aircraft descends. VCO alerts are based on either
radar altitude (if a radar altimeter is installed and available) or the GPS-computed height above terrain.
A VCO alert consists of a voice alert such as “five hundred”.
VCO alerts can be configured to occur at altitudes of 500’, 400’, 300’, 200’, 150’ and 50’; alerts may also be
disabled entirely. VCO alerts occur without visual annunciations or pop-up alerts.
Selecting VCO alerting altitudes:
1) Turn the large FMS knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) If the Aux - System Setup 2 Page is not already displayed, press the SETUP 2 Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude shown in the MAX SELECTED field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum altitude at which VCO alerts will be enabled from (from 500
to 50 feet), or select NONE to disable all VCO alerts.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob.
The G1000H remembers the VCO alert altitude configuration through power cycles.
Figure 6-102 Voice Callout Settings
(AUX - System Setup 2 Page)
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
381
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
During system power-up, HTAWS conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can
also be manually initiated. A voice alert is issued at test completion. HTAWS System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots. No HTAWS terrain or obstacle alerting is available while a system test is in
progress.
PFD/HTAWS Page Status
Annunciation
HTAWS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
HTAWS TEST
None
None
“HTAWS Test OK”
HTAWS System Failure
HTAWS FAIL
“HTAWS Failure”
HTAWS Not Available
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
None
“HTAWS Available”*
HTAWS FLTA Alerting Inhibited
None
None
Reduced Protection Mode Enabled
None
None
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
HTAWS Availability Restored
None
* Voice alert message issued if HTAWS is inhibited.
Table 6-13 HTAWS System Status Annunciations
Manually testing the HTAWS System:
1) Select the HTAWS Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-103).
3) Select ‘Test HTAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
Figure 6-103 HTAWS Page Menu
HTAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and GPS
status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the “HTAWS Failure” voice alert with
the ‘HTAWS FAIL’ visual annunciation.
HTAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
382
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
‘HTAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the HTAWS Page. The voice alert “HTAWS
Not Available” is also generated. When sufficient GPS signal is received and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the voice alert “HTAWS Available” is generated (unless HTAWS is inhibited).
Alert Cause
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid. HTAWS operating
with PFD Terrain or Obstacle
databases
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid on all
displays, invalid software
configuration, HTAWS audio
fault
No GPS position
PFD/HTAWS Page
Annunciation
None
HTAWS Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
HTAWS FAIL
“HTAWS Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when GPS
position returns and HTAWS is
not inhibited.
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is received
and HTAWS is not inhibited.
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when aircraft
enters database coverage area
and HTAWS is not inhibited.
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None
Out of database coverage
area
None
Table 6-14 HTAWS Abnormal Conditions
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
383
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
WARNING: Do not use Profile View Terrain data for primary terrain avoidance. Profile View Terrain is intended
only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
The G1000H offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors
and symbols used to represent terrain and obstacles are the same as those used in the HTAWS feature discussed
previously.
Accessing Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile
View is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the HTAWS section for more information about
displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
384
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map Range
Terrain Legend
Altitude Scale
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map
Range
Distance Scale
Figure 6-104 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-15) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated
on the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
Flight Phase
Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 6-15 Profile View Width Scale
PROFILE PATH
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown
as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-104) and is only available when Profile View is
enabled. White range markers both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers along the
distance scale inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km
if configured for metric units).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
385
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-105).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-106).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-107).
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
Figure 6-105 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-106 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
386
Figure 6-107 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The G1000H displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using three different symbols (Table 6-16).
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates that the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected, but is
outside the range of the map, is indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map and a half TA symbol at the relative bearing of the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-112) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-108).
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
387
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
Traffic Advisory
Off-Scale
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Display
Enabled
Traffic Status
Banner Messages
“Non Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Figure 6-108 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
388
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-109).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-110).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-111).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
389
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page
Menu
Figure 6-110 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-111 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing TIS information. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable
with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G1000H begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion
for more information.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
390
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Operating
Mode
“TIS Not
Available” Voice
Alert Mute
Status
Traffic Advisory,
300’ Above,
Descending
Traffic Advisory,
Off Scale Aircraft
is Out of Range,
1000’ Above and
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Non-Altitude
Reporting
Non-Threat
Traffic, 5000’
Above,
Climbing
Display
of System
Status
Mutes “TIS Not
Available” Voice
Alert
Non-Bearing Traffic (System is Unable to
Determine Bearing), Aircraft Distance is
7.0 nm, 500’ Above and Descending
Figure 6-112 Traffic Map Page
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
391
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-113 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
392
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The G1000H performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-17 TIS Failure Annunciations
System Test has Failed
Data Not Received
from Transponder
Figure 6-114 TIS Power-up Test Failure
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
393
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-18 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-15).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AGE MM:SS
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-19 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
394
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 GARMIN GTS TRAFFIC
WARNING: The Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only to aid
the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS traffic
information. It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Radar altimeter data is optional for the Traffic Advisory System (TAS). If radar altimeter data is
detected by the TAS at the beginning of a power cycle and that data is subsequently lost, the TAS will
declare a fault and will not provide traffic information.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TAS is installed.
The Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) enhances flight crew situational awareness by displaying
traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations and voice
traffic alerts to assist in efforts to visually acquire traffic.
The system is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders, and up
to 30 intruders equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential
can be displayed simultaneously. No traffic surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft
while monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing,
and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The traffic system
then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the
closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and voice alerting is provided.
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME
The GTS 800 surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal
conditions, the GTS 800 unit scans transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the GTS 800 automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore
range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
When paired with a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder, the GTS 800 uses Automatic Dependent
Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) data from participating airborne aircraft transponders to enhance the
positional accuracy and display of traffic within the TAS surveillance range. Traffic data supplied only by
ADS-B Ground Based Transceivers (GBTs) is not displayed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
395
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS SYMBOLOGY
The GTS 800 uses symbology to depict intruding traffic using the symbols shown in Table 6-20.
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory (TA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
(Not available in all installations.)
Traffic Advisory without ADS-B directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory (PA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. (Not
available in all installations.)
Proximity Advisory without ADS-B directional information.
Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
(Not available in all installations.)
Non-Threat Traffic without ADS-B directional information
PA or Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy is degraded. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track. (Not available in all installations.)
Table 6-20 GTS 800 Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm
that is neither a TA or PA.
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-115). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-115) indicates climbing or descending
traffic of at least 500 fpm with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
396
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-115 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track (Figure 6-116).
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Figure 6-116 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
Flight IDs may also be displayed with traffic symbols; see the Flight IDs discussion in this section for more
information.
The traffic system automatically suppresses the display of altitude-reporting aircraft on the ground under
either of the following conditions:
• On-ground aircraft is equipped with a Mode S transponder.
• On-ground aircraft is equipped with a Mode C transponder, and own aircraft’s optional radar altimeter is
displaying 400’ AGL or less.
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports/heliports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the
optional radar altimeter indicates own aircraft is below 2000’ AGL. If a radar altimeter is not installed or has
failed, the traffic system applies Level A sensitivity when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots. In all other
conditions, the traffic system uses Level B (greater) TA sensitivity to assess TA threats.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
397
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
Table 6-21 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
398
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-22). The voice
alert, “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-117).
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-119 and 6-122), a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-117 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-22 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
A TA voice alert may be muted while it is occurring by pressing the TA MUTE button on the collective. If a
new TA occurs, the voice alert will be heard.
If an optional radar altimeter indicates own aircraft is below 400’ AGL, the GTS 800 automatically mutes
traffic voice alerts. This muting behavior does not occur if the radar altimeter has failed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
399
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
test during flight.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the system is operating normally. The test takes ten
seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-118). The voice alert “TAS System Test Passed” or “TAS System Test Failed” is
issued when the test is complete, and the traffic system will be in Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for the full test pattern to be displayed.
4) Select the TEST Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Test Mode
Annunciation
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
Figure 6-118 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
400
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to
be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Selecting the OPERATE Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. It is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft orientation is always
heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm,
as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
401
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B Directional
Information, 500’ Below, Climbing
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Non-Threat Traffic,
2500’ Above,
Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
6000’ Above,
Level
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level, Flight ID
Displayed
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-119 Traffic Map Page
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
402
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Display
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
403
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight ID Display
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-120). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
Flight ID
Figure 6-120 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, select the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-121).
3) Press the ENT Key.
404
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-121 Traffic Map Page Menu
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system is
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-122).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
405
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
Non-Threat
Traffic
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information
Traffic
Advisory
Proximity
Traffic with
ADS-B Directional
Information
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
Figure 6-122 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-123).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-124).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-125).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
406
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-124 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-125 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional datalink weather products.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
407
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
Traffic System Test
Initiated
OPERATING
Operating
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
FAIL
Traffic System Failed*
* See Table 6-24 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-23 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic
unit, or data has been lost from radar altimeter (if
installed)
Table 6-24 Traffic Failure Annunciations
408
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-25 Traffic Status Annunciations
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
409
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
410
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for information regarding the installed autopilot.
NOTE: This section covers only the 407GX Autopilot annunciations that may appear in the G1000H AFCS
Status Box. These annunciations are not analogous to both the G1000H and the 407GX Autopilot. Refer to
the approved Bell 407GX Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for a comprehensive list of annunciations and
operating instructions.
AFCS STATUS BOX
Autopilot mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the autopilot is active. Autopilot status is
displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical
on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
Lateral Modes
Armed
Active
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
Figure 7-1 AFCS Status Box
Lateral
Armed
Active
VORA
VORA
VOR
VOR
LNVA
LNVA
GPS
GPS
LOC
LOC
BC
BC
HDG
GA
Vertical
Armed
Active
ALTS
ALTS
GS
GS
VNVA
VNVA
ALT
GA
ASPD
VS
Table 7-1 407GX Autopilot Mode Annunciations
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
411
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SPEED REFERENCES
Airspeed and Vertical Speed References are indicated as shown in Figures 7-2 and 7-3. Refer to the approved Bell
407GX Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for further discussion regarding the use of these reference indications.
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Figure 7-2 Airspeed Reference
412
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Figure 7-3 Vertical Speed Reference
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form, it is still advisable to
carry another source of charts on board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)
• Maintenance Logs
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• Position Reporting
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment for the
passengers
• Airport Directory
• Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS text messaging
• Wi-Fi connections
• Scheduler
• Auxiliary Video
The Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on the
PFD. SVT™ imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
Iridium Telephone, SMS messaging, and Data Link Services is an optional subscription service offered through
Garmin Connext™ and Iridium Satellite LLC.
Wi-Fi connection allows for the transmission of data recorded by the Maintenance Log feature. The recording of
this data is not visible to the pilot and requires no pilot interaction, other than setting up Wi-Fi connections where
applicable.
The Maintenance Log feature records maintenance data specified by the aircraft manufacturer. This data may then
be copied to an SD Card, or transmitted via Wi-Fi or Iridium telephone.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
‘Switch fuel tanks’ or ‘Altimeter-Transponder Check’ in the Messages Window on the PFD.
The Auxiliary Video feature allows viewing images from video equipment, such as an infrared camera.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
413
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT™)
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
The Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) is a visual enhancement to the G1000H Integrated Flight Deck. SVT
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑142). The depicted imagery
is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a six arc-second database
of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of six arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring six arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours, large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL
that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad
tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even if those features are found on the MFD map. The
terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one
arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain. The colors used to display the terrain elevation
contours are similar to that of the topo map display.
The Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System (HTAWS) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and
auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain
alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the HTAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
414
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
415
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PFD
BACK
SYN VIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
PATHWAY
BACK
SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
416
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
Pathways
Synthetic
Terrain
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
NOTE: Pathways are not available when the cross-pointer (X-Pointer) flight director format is selected.
PATHWAYS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
417
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
Selected
Altitude
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction. Pathways may then be re-displayed by pressing the
PATHWAY Softkey.
Departure and Enroute
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
418
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Descent and Approach
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
419
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
MAP
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
420
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
NOTE: The Flight Path Marker is not available when the cross-pointer (X-Pointer) flight director format is
selected.
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by HTAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
Wind
Vector
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
421
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems. Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until the
aircraft is approximately 8 nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the airspeed
or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
422
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations, where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Other
Runway
on Airport
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
423
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HTAWS ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA). When an obstacle becomes a potential impact point the color of the obstacle matches the red or yellow X
displayed on the MFD HTAWS Page. For more detailed information regarding HTAWS, refer to the Hazard
Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
HTAWS
Terrain
Alert
Terrain
Caution
Potential
Impact
Points
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
424
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols as
found on MFD HTAWS Page and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height
above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike on the MFD HTAWS Page, obstacles on the synthetic
terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle
is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not
shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
OBSTACLE
Annunciation
Obstacle
Caution
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
425
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
426
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
Field of View on the MFD
SVT View on the PFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
427
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an optional feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The maximum
map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport
detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks
including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map
ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced
position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
• NDB Information Page
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
428
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Aircraft
Position
Taxiway
Identification
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
Airport
Features
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR and station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
429
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
SAFETAXI
Option
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
430
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
431
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 13S1, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
SafeTaxi Data
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
432
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
433
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTVIEW
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
Inset Box
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
434
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1/2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
NOTAM, and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
HEADER
PLAN
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
INFO-2
ALL
STAR
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
435
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
436
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
437
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000H softkeys are blank. Once the
desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the DeKalb Peachtree (KPDK) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Select CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
438
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information: the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
Aircraft
Current
Position
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
439
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
440
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
441
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only
when an SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are
available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the
flight that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen databasepublished NOTAMs.
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
442
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
443
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
444
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
445
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
446
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
447
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Available
Information
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
448
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
449
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000H softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
450
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
451
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
ChartView Database
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
452
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing. The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1303, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–13 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The DISABLES date 28–APR–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
ChartView
Data
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
453
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date is the
revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date is the date that this database cycle is no longer
viewable. A date displayed in yellow indicates that date has passed. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates
no ChartView data is available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
454
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
455
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1/2, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
SHW CHRT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
INFO-2
ALL
STAR
WX
APR
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
456
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-51 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
457
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000H softkeys are blank. Once the
desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
458
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Select CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
459
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-55) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or
INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information: the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.
Info Box
Selected
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
460
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).
Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
461
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page
462
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available
only when an SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000H softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Info Available
on This Airport
WX Info
When
Available
Chart Not
To Scale
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
WX Softkey
Selected
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
463
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
464
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
465
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
466
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-65 Page Menus
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
467
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000H softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
468
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
469
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
470
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1302, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–13 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FliteCharts
Data
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
471
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date is the
beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date, the EFFECTIVE date
appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. A date displayed in yellow indicates that date has passed. The DISABLES date is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. A date displayed in yellow indicates that date has passed. REGION
and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not available on the database card
or no database card is inserted.
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
472
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
473
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
Airport Directory Database
Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
474
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 13D1, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
Airport Directory
Data
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
475
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
NOTE: Separate accounts must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice and Garmin
Connext™ for data transmission of maintenance reports.
Up to two optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceivers provide Iridium Satellite Telephone service and SMS text
messaging. Iridium telephone and text messaging are available to the flight crew through the Multi-function
Display, audio panel and headset. The system provides a telephone handset interface to be used for voice
communication between the aircraft cabin and the cockpit and for Iridium telephone service in the aircraft cabin. Operation of these features in the cockpit is accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE and AUX-TEXT
MESSAGING Pages. For operation using the cabin handset, consult the instructions provided with the handset.
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the
AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 8-75. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States
or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
After a subscriber account has been established, the system must be registered for datalink features such as
System Maintenance Logging or Connext™ Weather. Registration is accomplished by entering the required access
code. This process is only performed when initially setting up the system for Garmin Connext™ services.
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
Figure 8-75 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
476
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Registering the system for datalink services:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-SYSTEM STATUS. Note the System ID number in the AIRFRAME field as
seen in Figure 8-75.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-MAINTENANCE LOGS as shown in Figure 8-76.
Figure 8-76 Report Status Page Selected Prior to System Registration
4) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 8-77.
5) Select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
Figure 8-77 Select Register With Connext
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
477
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key. The Garmin Connext Registration window is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-78.
Figure 8-78 Enter Access Code
7) Enter the access code obtained from Garmin Flight Data Services in the ACCESS CODE field.
8) Press the ENT Key. REGISTER will now be highlighted as in Figure 8-78.
9) Press the ENT Key. System registration is complete when ‘REGISTERED’ is displayed in the STATUS field.
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
To view the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
478
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The PHONE STATUS display, as shown in Figure 8-79, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on PHONE STATUS display.
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Internal
Phones
External
Phone
Figure 8-79 Phone Status Display
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The Iridium Satellite Telephone System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
To enable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Enable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
To disable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-80 Enable Iridium Telephone System
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
479
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
INCOMING CALLS
NOTE: Outside callers should dial 00 + 8816 or 8817 + aircraft phone number when calling the aircraft
Iridium Telephone System.
480
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure 8-81
will be displayed and an aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at
times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to
the right of the MFD page title as shown in Figure 8-81. Also, the voice alert “Incoming Call” will be heard
on the selected cockpit audio.
Incoming Call Pop-up
Incoming Call Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-81 Incoming Call
Answering an incoming call:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
pressing the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Pressing the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the current call unanswered. Pressing the IGNRE ALL Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window for the current and all future incoming
calls and leave the current call unanswered. Pressing the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page allowing additional call information to be viewed before answering.
Disabling incoming call alerts:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
481
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
To make a call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
1) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
2) Press the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-82 will be shown.
Figure 8-82 Initiating an External Call
3) Pressing the number softkeys on the MFD, enter 00 + country code + area code + phone number when calling
a non-satellite telephone system. Enter 00 + Satellite Country Code (shown in the following table) + phone
number when placing a call to another satellite telephone system.
Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar
482
Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-83.
Figure 8-83 Make the Call
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-84.
Figure 8-84 System is Making the Connection
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
483
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-85. To exit the call, press
the HANGUP Softkey.
Figure 8-85 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
PLACING THE CALL ON HOLD
To place a call on hold:
Press the HOLD Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
484
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The phone is now isolated from the call as seen in Figure 8-86. Press the HOLD Softkey again to resume
the call.
Figure 8-86 Cockpit Phone on Hold
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
Senders should address text messages to the aircraft by entering [aircraft Iridium phone number]@msg.
iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the SATELLITE PHONE.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
485
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page as shown in Figure 8-87.
Figure 8-87 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
Table 8-6 Text Message Symbols
486
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure
8-88 will be displayed when a new text message is received.
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-88 New Text Message Received
Press the VIEW Softkey to view the message (Figure 8-88). Pressing the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish
the pop-up window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the IGNR ALL Softkey will extinguish
the pop-window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the
AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Figure 8-89 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
487
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message
Popups’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
Figure 8-90 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the REPLY Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
488
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-91 Composing a New Text Message
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter 00 + country
code + area code + phone number when sending to a text capable telephone. An email address may also be
entered. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of
the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers,
or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the NUMBERS Softkey. Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to
create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the SYMBOLS
Softkey. See Figure 8-91.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the SEND Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the SAVE Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the CANCEL Softkey to delete the message.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
489
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Figure 8-92 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’ as shown in Figure 8-92.
3) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED MESSAGES view is now displayed.
4) Press the NEW Softkey.
Or:
490
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED SMS TEXT MESSAGE Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-93.
Figure 8-93 Composing a Predefined Message
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘TITLE’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by
pressing the NUMBERS Softkey. Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the SYMBOLS Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the SAVE Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Pressing the CANCEL
Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Stop Editing Predefined Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
491
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the NUMBERS Softkey.
Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be
accessed by pressing the SYMBOLS Softkey. See Figure 8-94.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field (Figure 8-94).
Figure 8-94 Composing a New Text Message
4) Press the PREDEFD Softkey. The PREDEFINED MESSAGE MENU Window is displayed as seen in Figure 8-95.
Figure 8-95 Predefined Message List
492
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the SEND Softkey to transmit the message.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Show Inbox messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the INBOX Softkey
(Figure 8-96).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
Figure 8-96 Text Message Inbox
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
493
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Show Outbox messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the OUTBOX Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the DRAFTS Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TIME Softkey
(Figure 8-96).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window (Figure 8-96).
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TYPE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the ADDRESS
Softkey.
494
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the desired message box.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Message content is displayed as shown in Figure 8-97.
Figure 8-97 Viewing Message Content
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
495
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
5) To close the text message, press the CLOSE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the MRK READ Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Delete a message:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
496
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 WI-FI CONNECTIONS
The system can connect to a IEEE 802.11g compatible network provided the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of the network. The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK
encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web
proxies, captive portals, or other elements that require user credentials, including a username and password or a
redemption or access code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page.
To view the Wi-Fi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select DATA LINK.
To set up a new Wi-Fi connection:
1) Press the AVAIL Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the AVAILABLE NETWORKS
window as shown in Figure 8-98. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements
and whether the network has been saved in the system’s memory.
Figure 8-98 Available Wi-Fi Networks
2) If necessary, press the RESCAN Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
497
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network. See Figure 8-99.
Figure 8-99 Desired Network Selected
5) Press the CONNECT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect To Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
6) If the network is secured, a window similar to Figure 8-100 will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
passcode. Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to
enter upper case letters. If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
Figure 8-100 Enter Security Code
498
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
9) The SAVE SETTINGS window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘SAVE CONNECTION’.
Figure 8-101 Save Option
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
To connect the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘CONNECT’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
To save and connect the selected network:
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field as shown
in Figure 8-102.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in identifying
the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘CONNECT’.
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
Figure 8-102 Save Connection
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
499
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
To edit a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor as seen in Figure 8-103.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the AUTO CONNECT checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
Figure 8-103 Select Network to be Edited
500
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Press the EDIT Softkey. The cursor now appears in the CONNECTION SETTINGS window as shown in Figure
8-104.
Figure 8-104 Select Attributes to Edit
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘SAVE’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
To disconnect a Wi-Fi network:
Press the DISCNCT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
To delete a saved Wi-Fi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
501
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 MAINTENANCE LOGS
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the Maintenance Logs
feature.
The system provides recording of CAS, CMC, exceedances, and other critical aircraft data that occur while
the aircraft is on the ground or in flight. This may include, but not limited to, engine trend, exceedance and/
or aircraft position data.
The recorded data is then assembled into folders and can be copied to an SD Card or transmitted to Garmin
Connext™ using any of three data transmission methods (Wi-Fi, Iridium RUDICS, and Iridium Short Burst Data). The system selects the appropriate transmission based on settings assigned to each folder and communication
network availability. Upon first transmission of a log file, all data within the log file is transmitted. Subsequent
transmissions of that log file will include only new data added to the log.
If report transmission is interrupted for some reason (e.g. networks unavailable, hardware failure, loss of
power), the system will attempt to resume sending the reports at the next opportunity. The system ensures the
complete data set is transmitted.
Transmitted reports remain in the system’s memory until they are overwritten by newer data.
Control and monitoring of log transmissions is accomplished through the AUX-MAINTENANCE LOGS Page
as seen in Figure 8-105.
Viewing the Maintenance Logs Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-MAINTENANCE LOGS Page as seen in Figure 8-105. Available
transmission options are displayed in the Connection Status Window. In this case, only Wi-Fi is connected.
Figure 8-105 Maintenance Logs Page
502
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting the desired log folder:
1) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the Folders
Window, as shown in Figure 8-106.
Figure 8-106 Activate Folder Cursor
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the list of available folders as seen in Figure 8-107. ‘INT’ displayed next to the
folder name indicates that folder of log files is stored in internal system memory. ‘EXT’ displayed next to a folder
name indicates the folder, and its contents, is saved to the SD Card located in the bottom card slot of MFD.
Figure 8-107 Select Desired Folder Name
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired folder as shown in Figure 8-107.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
503
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. The log files for the selected folder are displayed as seen in Figure 8-108.
Figure 8-108 Select Desired Folder Name
5) Press the small FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting folder transmission settings:
1) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the list of available folders.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired folder.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Maintenance Logs Page Menu as in Figure 8-109.
Figure 8-109 Select Folder Settings
6) Press the ENT Key to display the Folder Transmission Settings as shown in Figure 8-110. Four different
transmission modes may be set. ‘TX MODE 1’ is the first transmit method the system will attempt to use when
sending data. If the system is unable to connect using the first method, the system will automatically attempt
504
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
to use the second method, ‘TX MODE 2’. The system will attempt to connect using mode 1 through 4 until a
connection is successful.
Figure 8-110 Set Transmission Mode Settings
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the available transmission settings as shown in Figure 8-111.
Figure 8-111 Set Transmission Method Settings
8) Turn the either FMS Knob to the desired transmission setting. Selecting ‘WI-FI’, as Figure 8-111 shows, will set
the system to transmit log data over a Wi-Fi network when the system connects using ‘TX MODE 1’. Selecting
‘SAT SHORT BURST’ or ‘SAT RUDICS’ will set the system to use one of the two Iridium telephone system options
for transmission. Selecting ‘NONE’ will disable the transmit mode.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘TX MODE 2’ field.
11) Repeat steps 7 through 9 to set the transmission methods for transmit modes 2 through 4.
12) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘TX TYPE’ field.
13) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the list of transmit type options as in Figure 8-112.
Figure 8-112 Select Transmit Type
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
505
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
14) Turn the either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired transmit type option.
15) Press the ENT Key.
16) The next steps vary based on the previous selection. Perform the following based on the transmit type selected.
a) Select ‘AUTOMATIC’ as the transmission type. Data is transmitted when specific alert triggers become valid.
Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘ALERT (ID)’ field.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter the appropriate alert ID (provided by the aircraft manufacturer) as shown in Figure
8-113.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-113 Enter Alert ID
Figure 8-114 Enter Transmit Time Period
Or:
a) Select ‘PERIODIC’ as the transmission type. Data is transmitted at specific time intervals. Turn the large FMS
Knob to select the ‘PERIOD’ field.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter the desired time interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) as seen in Figure 8-114.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
Select ‘IMMEDIATE’ as the transmission type. Data is transmitted immediately after it is logged.
Or:
Select ‘Manual’ as the transmission type. Data is transmitted only when the ‘EXPORT’ Button associated with a
specific log file selected.
17) With the cursor in the ‘PRIORITY’ field, use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired value as in Figure 8-115.
18) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘RETRY COUNT’ field.
Figure 8-115 Enter Priority Value
Figure 8-116 Enter Number of Transmit Retries
19) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the number of times the system will try to connect to a Wi-Fi network or make a
connection to the Iridium system. See Figure 8-116.
20) Press the ENT Key.
21) Press the small FMS Knob to remove the Folder Transmission Settings Window from the display.
506
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Send a transmission manually:
1) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of available folders.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired folder.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor on the ‘EXPORT’ button to the right of the log file to be transmitted.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to place cursor on ‘SELECT EXPORT MODE’ field.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the export mode options as seen in Figure 8-117.
Figure 8-117 Select Transmit
9) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘TRANSMIT’.
10) Press the ENT Key.
11) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘SELECT DATA TO EXPORT’ field as shown in Figure 8-118.
Figure 8-118 Select Which Data to Export
12) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection options, as in Figure 8-118. In this example, ‘COMPLETE LOG’
is selected. This option sends all the data contained in the file. Choosing ‘NEW DATA ONLY’ will send only new
data not sent in previous transmissions.
13) Press the ENT Key. The ‘OK’ Button is highlighted. To cancel the transmission, select the ‘CANCEL’ Button.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
507
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
14) Press the ENT Key. The selected data is being sent as indicated by the status ‘SENDING’ on the selected log file.
See figure 8-119. The following are indications used to show the status of a log files transmission.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
‘SENDING’ - The file is currently transmitting.
‘SENT’ - The file has been completely transmitted.
‘UNSENT’ - The file has neither been transmitted nor queued up for transmission.
‘QUEUED’ - The file is queued up for transmission when a connection is available.
‘PARTIAL’ - The log has been transmitted, but more data has been logged since the last transmission.
‘CANCELED’ - Transmission was stopped or the file was removed from the transmit queue.
‘FAILED’ - The log failed to transmit.
Figure 8-119 Status Indicates the Data is Being Sent
15) Press the TX INFO Softkey to view information for the last data transmission.
Figure 8-120 View Last Transmission Information
508
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Copy a log file to an SD Card:
1) Place an SD Card in the top card slot of the MFD.
2) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of available folders.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired folder.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor on the ‘EXPORT’ button to the right of the log file to be transmitted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The Export Log Window is displayed and the ‘OK’ Button highlighted as in Figure 8-121.
Figure 8-121 Copy to Card
8) Press the ENT Key. A .csv file is copied to the SD Card in top card slot of the MFD.
Delete all logs from a select folder:
1) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of available folders.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired folder.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu as in Figure 8-122.
Figure 8-122 Delete All Logs in a Selected Folder
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
509
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Logs In Folder’.
7) Press the ENT Key. The Confirmation Window is displayed as shown in Figure 8-123.
Figure 8-123 Delete Logs Confirmation
8) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Delete all logs from internal memory:
1) While viewing the Maintenance Logs Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu as in Figure 8-124.
Figure 8-124 Delete All Logs in Internal Memory
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Logs’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Confirmation Window is displayed as shown in Figure 8-125.
Figure 8-125 Delete Logs Confirmation
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. All log files located in the internal system memory will be deleted.
Log files in folders located on the SD Card in the bottom card slot of the MFD are not affected.
510
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 POSITION REPORTING
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the Position Reporting
feature.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
The position reports can be activated or deactivated by the pilot. While active, the position reports are
transmitted over the Iridium Short Burst Datalink periodically at a pilot specified interval or by pressing the SEND
RPT Softkey. The minimum automatic transmission period between reports is two minutes with more frequent
transmissions possible via manually sending reports with the SEND RPT Softkey. During voice communications
and data transfers the Iridium datalink is occupied and position reports will not be sent. During this period the
reports will buffer and be sent as a package as soon as the link is available. The position reports are received by
Garmin Connext and forwarded to select flight tracking provider(s).
To reduce excess usage, position reports are only transmitted while the aircraft is in the air.
The following are position reports contents:
• Tail Number
• Time
• Latitude/Longitude
• Ground Speed
• Ground Track
• Heading
• Barometric Altitude
• True Airspeed
• Outside Air Temperature
• Destination
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Airborne Status
The Airborne Status field is the indication that the aircraft is on the ground or in the air at the time the position
report was generated. The avionics generate a position report when the Airborne Status field changes state.
• Passenger Onboard
Passenger Onboard indicates passengers are on the aircraft at the time the position report was generated. A
position report is generated when the Passenger Onboard field changes state.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
511
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the Connext Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-CONNEXT Page as seen in Figure 8-126.
Figure 8-126 AUX-CONNEXT Page
Setting up Position Reporting:
1) With the AUX-CONNEXT Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor in the TRANSMISSION
PERIOD field as in Figure 8-127.
Figure 8-127 Set Transmission Period
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘AUTO’ for automatic transmission of position reports or ‘OFF’ to allow only
manual transmission of position reports.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the TRANSMISSION RATE field.
512
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the first digit, as shown in Figure 8-128.
Figure 8-128 Set Transmission Rate
5) Again, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the second digit.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
8) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the PASSENGERS ON BOARD field.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob left or right to select ‘YES’ or ‘NO’, as shown in Figure 8-129.
Figure 8-129 Set Transmission Rate
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
To send a position report manually:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-CONNEXT Page.
3) Press the SEND RPT Softkey, as seen in Figure 8-126.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
513
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link
Receiver.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69AH. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-130)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69AH
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Satellite Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer
to the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev J or later) for further
information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select XM Radio.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
514
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
Figure 8-130 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation
Data During
Initial Setup
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
515
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
The optional GRC 10 Remote Control Unit provides control of the SiriusXM Radio functions independent of
the MFD controls. See the GRC 10 User’s Guide for details.
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
Active
Channel
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
Figure 8-131 XM Radio Page
516
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category. Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go down through the list in the Channel Box, or move up the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display, or use the FMS Knobs, to directly select the
desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
517
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
Figure 8-132 Categories List
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
518
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press the SET Softkey.
4) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
Select PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select SET
to Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-133 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Figure 8-134 Volume Control
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
519
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.11 SCHEDULER
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Phase 1 Inspection, Switch fuel
tanks, or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based
on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
Figure 8-135 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
520
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message text.
Scheduler messages appear in the Messagess Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
MSG Softkey flashes. Pressing the MSG Softkey opens the Messages Window and acknowledges the scheduler
message. The softkey label no longer flashes after pressing the MSG Softkey. Pressing the MSG Softkey again
removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
Figure 8-136 PFD Alerts Window
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
521
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.12 AUXILIARY VIDEO
The G1000H system provides an optional control and display interface to an auxiliary video system. The
system can display video for up to two inputs.
There are four modes of operation of the auxiliary video display: Full-Screen, Full-Screen with Digital Zoom,
Split-Screen with Map, and Split-Screen with Map and Digital Zoom.
Displaying auxiliary video:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select VIDEO and display the AUX-VIDEO Page.
The video display softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
ENGINE
MAP
INPUT
SETUP
ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT MAP ACTV HIDE MAP
VID ACTV
CNTRST -
CNTRST +
BRIGHT -
BRIGHT +
SAT -
RESET
SAT +
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
Figure 8-137 Video Display Softkeys
Control of the AUX - VIDEO Page can also be accessed through the Page Menu.
Figure 8-138 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
522
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting video menu options:
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
VIDEO SETUP
Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While viewing
the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page
softkeys.
Adjusting the video settings:
1) With the AUX-VIDEO Page displayed, press the SETUP Softkey.
2) Press the BRIGHT - or BRIGHT +, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
3) Press the CNTRST- or CNTRST +, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
4) Press the SAT - or SAT +, to adjust display saturation in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
5) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
Press the RESET Softkey to return the display to the default settings.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
523
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DISPLAY SELECTION
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Input 1
Displayed
Video
Display
Map
View
Figure 8-139 AUX - Video Split-Screen
Figure 8-140 Full Screen Video Display
524
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INPUT SELECTION
While on the AUX - VIDEO Page, press the INPUT Softkey to select Input 1 or Input 2. The selected input
is displayed in the upper left of the video display.
ZOOM/RANGE
Pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between 1x
and 10x.
The RANGE Knob can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in and
out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the MAP ACTV or VID ACTV Softkey
determines which display the RANGE Knob adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP ACTV allows the
RANGE Knob to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display VID ACTV allows
the RANGE Knob to control the zoom setting of the video display.
When zooming in on the video display, a Zoom Window will appear in the upper right of the display. A box
within this window indicates the portion of the display currently being viewed. The currently displayed portion
of the full display may be adjusted by using Joystick.
Zoom
Window
Current
View
Figure 8-141 Zoom Window
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
525
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.13 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
• 6 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• HTAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-142 SVT Reversionary Mode
526
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
Figure 8-143 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
Blue Band
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
Figure 8-144 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
527
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
GDL 69H/69AH DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69H/69AH) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected
in the GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
Figure 8-145 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
528
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD))
NO SIGNAL
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
WAITING FOR DATA...
190-01255-01 Rev. A
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-7 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Messages
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
529
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
530
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
CAS MESSAGES
WARNING MESSAGES
See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation
Text
BATTERY HOT
ENGINE FIRE
ENGINE OUT
ENGINE OVSPD
FADEC FAIL
XMSN OIL PRESS
XMSN OIL TEMP
Description
Aural Alert
Battery overheat detected.
Fire/Overheat detector senses a temperature greater than or equal to 338°F.
Ng less than 55% or FADEC senses engine out.
Ng greater than 110% or NP vs torque is above maximum continuous limit.
Both the primary and reversionary channels have failed.
Transmission oil pressure is low.
Transmission oil overheat is detected.
Single Chime
Continuous Chime
Continuous Fast-Pulsing Chime
Single Chime
Repeating Ding-Dong Chime
Single Chime
Single Chime
CAUTION MESSAGES
See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation
Text
AP DEGRADED
AP FAILED
AUTOTRIM
BAGGAGE DOOR
BATTERY RLY
ENGINE CHIP
EXT PWR DOOR
FADEC DEGRADED
FADEC FAULT
FADEC MANUAL
FLOAT ARM
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LOW
FUEL VALVE
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Description
Audio Alert
A fault that prevents operation of some autopilot functions, such as loss
or degraded operation of an axis, loss of airspeed gain scheduling, stuck
trim beep switch, etc.
An autopilot fault related to the loss of a FCC channel, AHRS data, linear
actuator, or communication between involved LRUs.
The trim system is not responding to FCC commands.
Baggage door is not securely latched.
Battery relay energized when battery switch is off. Battery still connected
to DC bus.
Chip detector has detected debris in engine oil.
External power door not securely closed.
FADEC fault detected that may result in degraded engine performance.
A fault is recorded in the FADEC.
FADEC is in manual operating mode.
Floats Arm switch is in the armed position.
External fuel filter is partially blocked before impending bypass.
Fuel feed tank sensor indicates low fuel. 100 ± 10 pounds of fuel remain
in aft tank.
Fuel valve is in transition or is not in the commanded position.
Single Ping
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
531
APPENDIX A
Annunciation
Text
GEN FAIL
HEATER OVERTMP
HYDRAULIC SYS
L/FUEL BOOST
L/FUEL XFR
LITTER DOOR
MGT EXCEED
NG EXCEED
NG MISCOMP
NP EXCEED
NP MISCOMP
NR MISCOMP
PEDAL STOP
Q EXCEED
Q MISCOMP
R/FUEL BOOST
R/FUEL XFR
SLIDING DOOR
T/R CHIP
XMSN CHIP
532
Description
Generator not connected to DC bus.
An over temperature condition has been detected either under the pilot’s
seat, copilot’s seat, or in the vertical tunnel.
Low pressure in hydraulic system.
Left fuel boost pump has failed.
Left fuel transfer pump has failed.
Litter door is not securely latched.
MGT is in exceedance.
Engine Ng is in exceedance.
Ng miscompare event.
Engine NP is in exceedance.
NP miscompare event.
NR miscompare event.
Pedal stop check or failed to engage or disengage upon command. Or,
loss of ADC inputs.
Engine torque is in exceedance.
Q miscompare event.
Right fuel boost pump has failed.
Right fuel transfer pump has failed.
Left or right Sliding Door not securely closed
T/R Chip Detector has detected debris.
Transmission Chip Detector has detected debris in transmission oil.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
Audio Alert
Single Ping
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
ADVISORY MESSAGES
See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation
Text
ALTN DATA FAIL
Description
Alternate engine data source is not available.
AUTO RELIGHT
Engine igniter is operating.
ENG ANTI-ICE
Engine Anti-Ice valve is open, pressure is high.
FADEC MAINT
FADEC lamp test failure during power-up self test and in flight.
INSTR FAN
Instrument panel area fan has failed.
LASER FIRE
Laser Fire operating.
NG OAT LIMIT
QUIET MODE SEL
RESTART FAULT
START
Engine Ng limited due to OAT.
Quiet Mode switch is in quiet position.
ECU fault will not allow start in AUTO (ECU) Mode.
Engine starter is engaged.
SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATION
Annunciation
Text
FLOAT TEST
LASER ARMED
QUIET MODE ON
WOG
Description
Float system is in test mode.
Laser Armed.
Engine Quiet Mode is on.
Aircraft is on the ground.
G1000H SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey will flash to alert the flight crew of a new message. It
will continue to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in white
text. Messages that have become inactive will change to gray text. The MSG Softkey will flash if the state of
a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed from the
Message Window by pressing the flashing MSG Softkey.
The G1000H System Messages conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000H
system. Typically, a large red “X” appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the RFM for additional
information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Upon power-up of the G1000H system, certain windows remain invalid as G1000H equipment begins
to initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any window
continue to remain flagged, the G1000H system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
533
APPENDIX A
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
Messages Window
Figure A-1 G1000H System Messages
Message Softkey
Annunciation
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
Or
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GTX 33/D Transponder
Or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
Figure A-2 G1000H System Failure Annunciations
534
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation
Comment
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
Indicates a configuration module failure.
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
535
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if
GPS signals are not present (see AFM).
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red “X” through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation display) indicates that
the field is not receiving valid data.
HTAWS ALERTS
Alert Type
PFD/HTAWS
MFD
Page Alert Pop-Up Alert (except
Annunciation
HTAWS Page)
Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Voice Callout (VCO)
None
None
“Five Hundred”, “Four Fifty”, “Four Hundred”,
“Three Fifty”, “Three Hundred”, “Two Fifty”,
“Two Hundred”, “One Fifty”, “One Hundred”, “Fifty”
HTAWS Alerts Summary
536
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
HTAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/HTAWS
Page Status
Annunciation
HTAWS Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Aural Message
HTAWS TEST
None
None
“HTAWS Test OK”
HTAWS System Failure
HTAWS FAIL
“HTAWS Failure”
HTAWS Not Available
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
None
“HTAWS Available”*
HTAWS FLTA Alerting Inhibited
None
None
Reduced Protection Mode Enabled
None
None
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
HTAWS Availability Restored
None
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid. HTAWS operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or invalid
on all displays, invalid software configuration,
HTAWS audio fault
No GPS position
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
HTAWS FAIL
NO GPS POSITION
None
“HTAWS Failure”
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when
GPS position returns. and
HTAWS is not inhibited.
Excessively degraded GPS signal
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is
received and HTAWS is not
inhibited.
Out of database coverage area
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available” when
aircraft enters database
coverage area and HTAWS
is not inhibted.
* Aural message not issued if HTAWS is inhibited.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
537
APPENDIX A
VOICE ALERTS
Voice Alert
“Minimums, minimums”
“Vertical track”
“Traffic”
“TIS Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
“TAS System Test Passed”
“TAS System Test Failed”
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Description
The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is enabled.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TIS and GTS 800).
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (Skywatch TAS system).
Played when the GTS 800 TAS system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
Played when the GTS 800 TAS system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
Intruder bearing (GTS 800 only)
Intruder relative altitude (GTS 800 only)
Intruder distance (GTS 800 only)
G1000H SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding G1000H message advisories that may be displayed by
the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Bell 407
Rotorcraft Flight Manual (AFM) and Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) takes precedence over
any conflicting guidance found in this section.
This section describes various G1000H system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red “X” annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000H System Annunciation section.
538
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name]
Key is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key name]
Key is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1
configuration module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD and PFDs have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the
display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
539
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain
card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure that the
database error exists.
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data card is
Directory database error exists.
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or types (Americas,
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
European, etc.) installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database version or type
in all displays.
540
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
mismatch.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle
database mismatch.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
navigation database updated.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or
MFD1] Terrain awareness display
unavailable.
Comments
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Install correct
terrain database version or type in all displays.
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database installed. Install correct obstacle
database in all displays.
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database.
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for HTAWS in the specified PFD or MFD
is missing or invalid.
GMA 350H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
Comments
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative. The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk error An error has occurred in transferring data between the two GMAs. The system should be
has occurred.
serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
error. Config service req’d.
system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still
service. Return unit for repair.
be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced when
possible.
GIA 63H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1
temperature too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2
temperature too low.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm
up to operating temperature.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
541
APPENDIX A
GIA 63H MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs
service. Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs
service. Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk
key is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk
key is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
542
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be
serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may still
be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”)
position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position.
Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
GIA 63H MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS
navigation. Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
Comments
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav angle is set to
‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system should
be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GEA 71H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
543
APPENDIX A
GTX 33H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is
inoperative.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GRS 77H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
valid airspeed.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far
North/South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS relies
on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model when
practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1
magnetometer fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GSR 56H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
544
Comments
A failure has been detected in the #1 GSR 56H. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
GDL 59H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59 has failed.
Comments
GDL 59H configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL 59
router has failed.
REGISTER GFDS – Data services
are inoperative, register w/GFDS.
MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H router. The system should be serviced.
The GDL 59H is not registered with Garmin Flight Data Services, or it’s current
registration data has failed authentication.
The GDL 59H has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GDL 69AH MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GWX 68 ALERT MESSAGES
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
GWX SERVICE – GWX needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.
WX ALERT – Possible severe
weather ahead.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68 or the GWX 68 is reporting a
fault. The GWX 68 radar system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GWX 68. The GWX 68 may still be usable.
The GWX 68 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Possible severe weather detected within +/- 10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
545
APPENDIX A
GDC 74H MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDC is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC 74B has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTS 800 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
Comments
The GTS and GDU have incompatible configurations. This alert is also set when the GTS
has an invalid mode S addres sconfigured or the mode S address does not match both
XPDR mode S addresses.
MANIFEST – GTS software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GTS has incorrect software installed. The G1000H system should be serviced.
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan
waypoint is locked.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
waypoint moved.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
546
Comments
Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually edited.
This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the user-modified
procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete approach or
arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed from the flight plan.
Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains locked
waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with current
waypoint.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at
waypoint -[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach
current vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported
leg type in flight plan.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Comments
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path angle and
vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device should
be serviced.
A data path connected to the GDU, GSD 41, or the GIA 63/W has failed.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
547
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Message
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of
available terrain region.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD
1 REM – Card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD
2 REM – Card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1
ERR – Card 1 is invalid.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2
ERR – Card 2 is invalid.
HDG PRESET MODE – Magnetic
anomoly detected. HPM is available.
548
Comments
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for geographic
locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may differ from
the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
Message criteria entered by the user.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The magnetometer has detected a magnetic anomoly that could affect heading
indications. Heading Preset Mode may be used.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only. User waypoints The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These waypoints
imported successfully. No stored flight plan data
have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the system have been
was modified.’
modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others had errors
and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or more of
these waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The flight plan
was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints locked.’
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find in the
navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within the system
before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user waypoints
has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD card have been
imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are locked in the flight plan. The
flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming conflicts with
waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not have
sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
549
APPENDIX A
Blank Page
550
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on http://fly.garmin.com
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles, and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to http://fly.
garmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report”.
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interuption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD
cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not all SD
cards are compatible with the G1000H. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
JEPPESEN DATABASES
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a 14day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no
longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
NOTE: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
551
APPENDIX B
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
552
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display (MFD1
DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database
into the active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes
approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message,
‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and the MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
553
APPENDIX B
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown in Figure
B-4.
Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
6) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-5.
Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt
7) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-6.
Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt
8) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power
while the display is starting.
9) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD. Progress can be monitored in the
SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
554
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
13) Turn system power OFF.
14) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15) Turn system power ON.
16) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
18) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
19) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on the PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert
message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on the PFD and the MFD
are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.
GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Airport Directory
(AOPA)
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on two Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card).
Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each display as shown in Figure B-7. These cards
must not be removed except to update the databases stored on each card.
MFD
PFD
Figure B-7 Correct Database Locations
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
555
APPENDIX B
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. It is
very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the
obstacle database. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized throughout
the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar databases
do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that does not
already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle,
Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the SD card
that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the navigation database which
is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and ChartView) which are only
required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download new databases to the MFD
card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
556
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-11) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will switch between the PFD and MFD. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected display. After a successful sync and restart, verify that the
proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.
‘Card Full’ Message
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
557
APPENDIX B
Error Message
Description
Canceled
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in
display being updated
Card Full
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Err
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
Timeout
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
new databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-4A, -4B, -4C, -4D, -4E, or -4F) from the PFD and
MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this
message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
558
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
Figure B-10 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-9.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-11 Display Database Softkey
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
559
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS (GRS).
If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-12 GRS Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as shown in figure B-12, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-13.
Figure B-13 Uploading Database to GRS
2) When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
560
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
GLOSSARY
ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AWOS
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator, alternate
amperes
annunciation
antenna
Aircraft Owners & Pilots Association
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
along-track
automatic sequence
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
BFO
BKSP
BRG
C
ºC
190-01255-01 Rev. A
CA
CALC
Calibrated Airspeed
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication,
Navigation,
&
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
Course to Steer
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack Error
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
561
APPENDIX C
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
DEST
DF
DFLT
DGRD
DH
Dilution of Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGT
EIS
EGNOS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
Endurance
ENG
ENGD
ENR
Enroute Safe Altitude
ENT
562
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
destination
Direct to Fix
default
degrade
decision height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
direction
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
departure
dead reckoning
disabled
Desired Track
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
Service
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
engine
engaged
enroute
The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight plan or
direct-to.
enter
EPE
EPU
ERR
ESA
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Position Uncertainty
error
Enroute Safe Altitude
A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft
should reach the destination waypoint,
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to reach the
destination waypoint from the present
position, based upon current ground
speed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
expired
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
FMS
FOB
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
Fuel On Board
G/S, GS
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
glideslope
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
gph
GPS
Grid MORA
Groundspeed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
HA
HDG
Heading
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; one
degree latitude by one degree longitude
in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1000 feet
for all areas of the grid
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground speed
Garmin Transponder
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
HF
Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg
mercury
HI
high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
hPa
hectopascal
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
HPM
Heading Preset Mode
hr
hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
190-01255-01 Rev. A
HT
HUL
Hz
I
IAF
IAT
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
in
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
inch
inactive
increase fuel
indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on
the aircraft panel.
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
km
kt
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
L
left, left runway
LAT
latitude
LBL
label
lb
pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL
local
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
563
APPENDIX C
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
LO
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MET
METAR
MEPT
MFD
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MV DB
MVFR
564
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
low
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
left
lightning
level
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
megahertz
microphone
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Magnetic Field Variation Database
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NoPT
NRST
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
nearest
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
parallel track
Push-to-Talk
power
QTY
quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
right, right runway
radial
Receiver
Autonomous
Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
RAM
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
RFM
RFMS
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
Rotorcraft Flight Manual
Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SVS
SW
SYS
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
select
surface
Standard
Instrument
Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
simulator
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision System
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
190-01255-01 Rev. A
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
Track Angle Error
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURN
TX
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System, true airspeed
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position; also ‘Ground
Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
total
procedure turn
transmit
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V, Vspeed
VA
VAPP
VAR
VD
Vdc
VERT
Vertical Figure of Merit
velocity (airspeed)
Heading Vector to Altitude
VOR approach
variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance
volts, direct current
vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
565
APPENDIX C
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL
volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial
VS
vertical speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
VTF
vector to final
566
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of G1000H operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions
or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garminauthorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
LP and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to provide additional precision for lateral (LP, LPV) and
vertical (LPV) guidance capability. LPV approaches also allow lower approach minimums. When SBAS is not
available, LP and LPV approaches cannot be added to the active flight plan. An LP or LPV approach already
loaded will be downgraded to an LNAV or LNAV/VNAV approach, using LNAV or LNAV/VNAV minima.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
When SBAS is unavailable, the GPS receivers use Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) to
perform the following functions:
• Monitor and verify integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notify pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase of
flight
• Predict satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
• Detect and exclude bad satellites from the navigation solution (Fault Detection and Exclusion, FDE)
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
567
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000H System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL Altitude?
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000H indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan
is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000H uses the
waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated,
the G1000H System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified.
Should an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until
the procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000H?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000H System meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3
or TSO-C145c Class 3 and ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an
expired database. See the approved Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (RFMS) as well as the Aeronautical
Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and the
568
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
G1000H automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the G1000H allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000H suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000H from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
Why does the G1000H not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
The G1000H only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
‘SUSP’ annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
The G1000H allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
The G1000H smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up
to 30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
569
APPENDIX D
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
When does the CDI scale change?
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back to
1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions down
further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000H does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000H directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000H provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
570
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped
aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track
reports to generate traffic notification. The G1000H System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map
Page of the MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as
well as on the PFD Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G1000H System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nm radius, from 3,000 feet below,
to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
TIS VS. TAS/TCAS
The Traffic Information System (TIS) is a ground-based service that requires contact with a ground station
through a datalink radio in order to receive traffic information. Traffic Advisory (TAS) and Traffic Collision
Avoidance Systems (TCAS) are self-contained. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second
update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to provide
a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
TIS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meterorlogical conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more
comprehensive explanation.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided
by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in
visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meterological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual
traffic avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance
maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar
antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the groundbased radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
• Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
571
APPENDIX E
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations
is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in
mountainous regions.
TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five
seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay.
These algorithms use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of
display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on
the Traffic Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and target track vector. This can cause a delay in
the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate
and may be used to assist in spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display
the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder
aircraft course stabilizes.
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of
the aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and
transponder software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC,
malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
572
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
DISPLAY SYMBOLS
State Highway
AIRPORT
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
US Highway
National Highway
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Small City or Town
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Medium City
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Large City
TRAFFIC
Towered, Serviced Airport
Description
Symbol
Restricted (Private) Airport
Non-Threat Traffic
Heliport
Proximity Advisory (PA) (Not avialable with
TIS
NAVAIDS
Item
Symbol
Intersection
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
BASEMAP
Item
Symbol
Traffic Advisory (TA) arrow with ADS-B
directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track (GTS
820 only).
Proximity Advisory (PA) arrow with ADS-B
directional information. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track (GTS 820 only).
Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B
directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track (GTS
820 only).
PA or Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B
directional information, but positional
accuracy is degraded. Points in the direction
of the aircraft track (GTS 820 only).
Interstate Highway
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
573
APPENDIX F
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
State or Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Lattitude/Longitude
574
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is at or above current aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 0’ and 250’
below current aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is 250’ or more below
current aircraft altitude
HTAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example
Annunciation
Warning
Caution
HTAWS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
TERRAIN COLOR CHART
Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for HTAWS
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
575
APPENDIX F
MISCELLANEOUS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Item
Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Feature
Symbol
Terrain Proximity/TAWS display enabled
Traffic display enabled
Default Map Pointer
NEXRAD display enabled
Elevation Pointer
Cloud Top display enabled
Wind Vector
Echo Top display enabled
SiriusXM Lightning display enabled
Measuring Pointer
Cell Movement display enabled
Overzoom Indicator
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
Terrain Proximity or TAWS Enabled
METARs display enabled
Traffic Enabled
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
Parallel Track Waypoint
County Warnings display enabled
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
Air Report (AIREPs)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(due to loss of GPS position)
576
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
TELEPHONE SYMBOLS
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
SMS MESSAGING SYMBOLS
Description
Message Symbol
Description
Phone is Idle
Received text message that has not
been opened
Phone is ringing
Received text message that has been
opened
Phone has a dial tone (off
hook) or connected to another
phone
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Phone dialed is busy
Text message has been sent
Phone is dialing another phone
System failed to send text message
Phone has failed
Predefined text message
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data
transmission
Calling other phone or
incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
577
APPENDIX F
Blank Page
578
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
INDEX
A
Access code--------------------------------------------------478
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------225
Active channel-----------------------------------------------517
Active database-------------------------------------- 552, 553
Active frequency------------------------------------- 104, 113
ADF---------------------------------------------------------122
AC-U-KWIK--------------------------------------------------473
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 122, 124
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------124
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------124
ADF/DME tuning--------------------------------------------125
ADS-B---------------------------------------------------------395
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------------- 48
AHRS------------------------------------------ 14, 15, 534, 544
Aircraft load weight----------------------------------------268
Aircraft load weights---------------------------------------268
Air Data Computer--------------------------------- 1, 15, 534
AIREP---------------------------------------------------------337
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------184
Nearest----------------------------------------------------- 38
Airport Directory------------------------------- 413, 473, 474
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 199, 200, 302
Airspeed Indicator----------------------------------48, 50–51
Airways-------------------------------------------------------- 21
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------238
Expanded--------------------------------------------------238
Alerting System---------------------------------------------533
Alert messages----------------------------------------------545
Alerts
Airspace---------------------------------------------------- 35
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 36
Audio voice------------------------------------------------ 36
Alerts, Aircraft-----------------------------------------------531
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 229, 230
ALT------------------------------------------------------------298
Alternate Engine Data Source Annunciations----------- 86
Altimeter------------------------------------------------- 52–53
Altimeter barometric setting------------------------------- 53
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 245, 285
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 74
Altitude buffer------------------------------------------------ 35
Annunciations
Test tone---------------------------------------------------- 42
Annunciations, G1000 System----------------------------- 15
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------124
AOPA---------------------------------------------------------473
AOPA Airport Directory------------------474, 475, 476, 556
Approach-----------------------------------------------------568
Activating-------------------------------------------------258
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Loading--------------------------------------------- 222, 255
Removing--------------------------------------------------259
Approach box-----------------------------------------------458
Approach channel----------------------------------- 222, 255
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 258, 266
Arrival procedure------207, 220, 252, 254, 283, 285, 294
Attitude---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Attitude Indicator-----------------------------------48, 51–52
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------145
Automatic Dependent Surveilence - Broadcast--------395
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 411–412
Status Box------------------------------------------ 411, 412
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------112
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------120
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------107
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------116
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------152
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 29
Auxiliary Video--------------------------------------- 413, 522
AUX - system status page-432, 433, 453, 454, 470, 471,
472, 475
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 164, 207
B
Backlighting----------------------------------------- 12, 45, 46
Barometric setting, Altimeter------------------------------- 53
Basic Empty Weight----------------------------------------268
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------159
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 59
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 60
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------263
CDI---------------------------- 254, 274, 285, 293, 300, 547
CELL MOV Softkey------------------------------------------323
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 436, 457
Chart options----------------------------------------- 444, 464
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 450, 468
ChartView--------------------------------------- 413, 434, 453
ChartView functions----------------------------------------435
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------445
ChartView profile view-------------------------------------446
ChartView softkeys-----------------------------------------435
City Forecast-------------------------------------------------328
CLD TOP Softkey------------------------------------- 321, 354
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------238
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------111
COM frequency box--------------------------------- 101, 104
COM radio
Channel spacing------------------------------------------ 38
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------145
Controls
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 16–19
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
I-1
INDEX
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------225
County Warnings--------------------------------------------333
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)-----------------38, 62–63
Course To Fix------------------------------------------------262
Crew Alerting System (CAS)--------------------------- 94–98
Messages---------------------------------------------- 96–98
Cyclone-------------------------------------------------------334
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 83
D
Data Bar fields, MFD---------------------------------------- 37
Database------------------------------------------------------ 11
Databases----------------------------------------------------551
Database Synchronization-------------------- 552, 556, 558
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Data Link Receiver------------------------------------------529
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------528
Data reports-------------------------------------------------502
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 33
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 450, 468
Day view----------------------------------450, 451, 468, 469
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------555
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 78
Declutter------------------------------------------------------ 21
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 79
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------225
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 227, 228
An entire procedure------------------------------ 227, 228
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 226, 227
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------226
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------265
Departure
Procedure------------------------------218, 233, 249, 251
Select------------------------------------249, 252, 255, 259
Time--------------------------------------------------------263
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 44
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 23
Direct-to-177, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 243, 244, 283, 285,
300
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------125
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------125
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------125
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 122, 125
DME information-----------------------------------------59, 60
Dual navigation database---------------------------------553
Dual Tachometer--------------------------------------------- 86
E
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------320
I-2
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------145
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 83–90
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------126
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------143
Estimated Landing Fuel------------------------------------270
Estimated landing fuel weight----------------------------270
Estimated landing weight---------------------------------270
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 23
Excess fuel---------------------------------------------------270
Excess fuel weight------------------------------------------270
F
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------145
Failure
Input-------------------------------------------------------- 14
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------175
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------238
Storing-----------------------------------------------------568
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 44
FliteCharts---------------------------------------------------413
FliteCharts®-------------------------------------------------455
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------471
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------471
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------456
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 245, 290
Freezing Levels----------------------------------------------329
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------197
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------111
Frequency transfer arrow----------------------------------105
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------567
Fuel
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------265
Endurance-------------------------------------------------265
Remaining-------------------------------------------------265
Required---------------------------------------------------265
Statistics---------------------------------------------------265
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)------------------------------------ 83
Fuel on Board----------------------------265, 268, 269, 270
Fuel reserve weight-----------------------------------------269
G
Garmin Connext--------------------------------------------413
Garmin Flight Data Services------------------------ 502, 511
GDC 74A-------------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69/69A---------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69H/69AH---------------------------------------------306
GDU 1040------------------------------------------------------ 1
GEA 71---------------------------------------------------------- 1
geodetic sea level-------------------------------------------372
GIA 63----------------------------------------------------------- 1
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
INDEX
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------298
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------298
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 55
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 201–304
Receiver information--------------------------------- 22–24
GMA 1347---------------------------------------------1, 11, 45
GMU 44--------------------------------------------------------- 1
Gross weight----------------------------------------- 268, 270
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 45
GRS 77---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GSL------------------------------------------------------------372
GTX 33------------------------------------------------------- 1, 3
GTX 33 Transponder----------------------------------------126
H
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 48
Heading Preset Mode---------------------------- 14, 17, 548
Hook weight-------------------------------------------------268
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)--------------48, 56–68
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------113
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------113
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------113
hurricane-----------------------------------------------------334
I
Icing-----------------------------------------------------------335
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------115
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------263
Initialization (system)---------------------------------------- 11
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 185–186
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------225
IOI------------------------------------------------------ 378, 536
Iridium------------------------------------------------- 476, 479
Iridium satellite network----------------476, 478, 482, 485
J
Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------551
L
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------163
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------274
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 74
LPV----------------------------------------------------- 274, 300
M
Magnetic Field Variation Database-----------------------560
Magnetometer-------------------------------------------- 1, 15
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------154
Map pages---------------------------------------------------- 28
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------121
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 72
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 34
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 26
Message advisories-539, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 546, 547,
548
Metric display, Altimeter------------------------------- 52–53
MFD Data Bar fields----------------------------------------- 37
Minimum descent altitude, barometric------------------- 74
Minimums----------------------------------------------------538
Missed Approach----------------- 207, 259, 271, 274, 300
Mode S------------------------------------------------ 126, 127
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------115
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 20
N
National Weather Service----------------------------------333
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------114
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------114
NAV frequency box-----------------------------------------101
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 245, 246
Map--------------------------------------------------------204
Navigation database-------------------------- 540, 546, 549
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------113
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 48
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 62–64
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 48
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------113
Nearest
Airport---------------------181, 182, 183, 184, 197–200
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------184
Airports----------------------------------------------- 38, 258
Airports Page-------------------------------- 182, 183, 184
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------184
VOR------------------------------------------------- 197–198
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 30
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------- 21
NEXRAD Softkey------------------------------------- 316, 351
Night view--------------------------------450, 451, 468, 469
Normal display operation----------------------------------- 12
Normal operating mode------------------------------------ 12
O
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 67–68
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 541, 542
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 45
Oil Temperature (OIL °F)------------------------------------ 83
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 568–569
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 263, 265
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)------------------------48, 69
Overview-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
I-3
INDEX
P
Service Class-------------------------------------------------515
SIGMET------------------------------------------------ 324, 356
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 231, 233
SiriusXM
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 39–40
radio--------------------------------------------------------306
PIREP-------------------------------------------------- 337, 362
SiriusXM radio presets-------------------------------------518
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 51
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------519
Power Assurance Check------------------------------------- 88
SiriusXM Satellite Weather
Predefined message--------------------------- 490, 491, 493
AIRMETs-------------------------------------------- 324, 356
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
SIGMETs-------------------------------------------- 324, 356
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 16–18
Slip/Skid Indicator-------------------------------------------- 51
Profile Path--------------------------------------------------385
Softkeys
Profile View--------------------------------------------------384
LTNG-------------------------------------------------------321
PFD----------------------------------------------------16–18
Q
Split COM operation----------------------------------------137
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------106
Standby frequency----------------------------- 104, 107, 113
ADF---------------------------------------------------------122
R
Standby frequency field------------------------------------104
Radar altitude--------------------------------------------74, 76
Standby Navigation Database--------------------- 553, 555
Radio volume level-----------------------------------------115
Stormscope WX-500 Series II-----------------------------366
RAIM---------------------------------------254, 271, 272, 273
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------145
Range---------------------------------------------------------173
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------264
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-2 4 – 2 5 , Sunset--------------------------------------------------------264
271, 567
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------328
Reduced Protection Mode---------------------------------379
SVS------------------------------------------------------------548
Register-------------------------------------------------------478
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------526
Report transmissions---------------------------------------502
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------573
Required
Synoptics------------------------------------------------- 87–94
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------291
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 413, 414
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------291
System annunciations--------------------------------- 15, 533
Reversionary display operation---------------------------- 13
System ID----------------------------------------------------477
ROC---------------------------------------------------- 378, 536
System message advisories--------------------------------538
RP-------------------------------------------------------------379
System Setup Page------------------------------------------ 31
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 3
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 42
RS-485-------------------------------------------------------- 2, 3
System time-----------------------------------------------33, 48
Runway
T
Minimum length------------------------------------------- 38
Surface------------------------------------------------------ 38
TA-------------------------------------------------------------538
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 291, 292
TAF----------------------------------------------------- 325, 357
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
Takeoff Timer------------------------------------------------- 85
Takeoff weight-----------------------------------------------268
S
TAS----------------------------------------------------- 538, 544
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 413, 428, 431
TAWS-------------------------------------------------- 376, 383
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------432
TAWS annunciations---------------------------------------- 73
SBAS---------------------------------------271, 272, 273, 567
Telephone---------------------------- 29, 413, 476, 478, 480
Scheduler----------------------------------------413–414, 520
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 436, 456
SD card-------------------------------------------------------- 10
Terrain--------------------------------------------------- 21, 541
Secure Digital (SD) card------------------------------------551
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
Selected Altitude--------------------------------------------- 48
annunciations------------------------------------------------ 73
Selected Altitude Bug--------------------------------------- 48
Text message-----------------------------485, 487, 490, 493
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------176
Text messaging----------------------------------------------485
Selected heading--------------------------------------------- 57
Timer----------------------------------------------------------546
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------104
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 44
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------569
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 44
Sequencing waypoints, suspend--------------------------- 68
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 43
I-4
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
INDEX
Time, system-------------------------------------------------- 33
TOD---------------------------------------------- 290, 291, 297
Toggling ADF frequencies---------------------------------123
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 160, 161, 170
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 290, 291
Topographical data------------------------------------------ 21
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------162
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 56
Track indicator------------------------------------------------ 56
Traffic---------------------------------------------------------- 20
Traffic Advisory----------------------------------------------538
Traffic advisory (TA)------------------------------------------ 73
Traffic Information Service (TIS)-------------------- 571–572
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 73
Transponder code entry------------------------------------129
Transponder data box--------------------------------- 99, 101
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------127
Transponder softkeys---------------------------------------127
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------128
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 59
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 263, 264, 265
Trip statistics--------------------------------------45, 264, 265
True Airspeed-------------------------------------- 48, 50, 265
Tuning ADF frequencies------------------------------------123
Turbulence---------------------------------------------------336
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------569
Turn Rate Indicator------------------------------------------ 59
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
U
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 436, 457
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------432
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------240
Volume-------------------------------------------------------519
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 197–198
VOR selection------------------------------------------------113
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------292
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 245, 290
W
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 274, 566, 567
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------569
Skipping---------------------------------------------------569
Waypoint Pages (WPT)-------------------------------------- 28
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 202, 209, 210, 214, 271
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Wi-Fi--------------------------------------------- 497, 501, 502
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 150, 172
Winds Aloft------------------------------------------- 330, 359
WIND Softkey----------------------------------------- 330, 359
X
XM
Radio-------------------------------------------------------514
XM channel list----------------------------------------------516
XM lightning-------------------------------------------------- 21
XM radio-----------------------------------------------------516
XM radio troubleshooting---------------------------------528
XM satellite radio------------------------------------ 514, 517
XM weather/radio--------------------------------------------- 4
Z
Zero fuel weight------------------------------------- 268, 270
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------152
V
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------246
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)--------------55, 291, 292
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------245
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------244
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------246
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------------------ 54
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------538
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------130
Video---------------------------------------413, 522, 523, 524
VNAV---------------------------------------------------------205
VNV---------------------------------------------- 290, 547, 566
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------243
Enabling---------------------------------------------------243
VNV indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 71
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------- 73, 391
Voice Callouts--------------------------------------------31, 41
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
I-5
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000H™ Pilot’s Guide for the Bell 407GX
190-01255-01 Rev. A
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising